You are on page 1of 324

Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

03-602054 Issue 1 January 2008

© 2008 Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved. Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya Inc. can assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases. For full legal page information, please see the complete document, Avaya Legal Page for Software Documentation, Document number 03-600758. To locate this document on the website, simply go to http://www.avaya.com/support and search for the document number in the search box. Documentation disclaimer Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. Customer and/or End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User. Link disclaimer Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation, and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages. Warranty Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Unauthorized reproduction, transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the applicable law. Avaya support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support

Contents

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading this book and updates from the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety labels and security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Within the US. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending us comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13
13 13 13 15 16 16 16 16 17

Chapter 1: Before you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before going to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server . . . . . . Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server Obtaining the G450 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining RFA access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking license file and Avaya Communication Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP) . . . Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop . . . . . . . . . . Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining the RAS IP address and password . . . . . . . . . Downloading recent firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . Environmental verification Power verification . . . . . Grounding verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 24 24 24 24 25 25 26 27 27

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking and checking package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29
29 29

Issue 1 January 2008

3

Brackets without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . Brackets with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450. . . Before mounting the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting Fastening the G450 to the wall . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the G450 on a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30 30 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 37 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 42 43 43 44 45

Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 3: Installing the media modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis Combination limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocating slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the S8300 Server module . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 4: Attaching ground conductors General grounding requirements . Installation location . . . . . . Ground conductor . . . . . . . Ground block. . . . . . . . . . Restricted Access Location . . Approved grounds. . . . . . . . . Connecting the safety ground . . Attaching the ground wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWR LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3: Connecting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . Connecting a switch or a network data port . . . . . . . Connecting a computer to the Services port . . . . Connecting an IP telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the telephone to the G450 . . . . . . . . Connecting an ISDN BRI station . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port . Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port Connecting an analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47
47 47 48 48 49 49 49 49 50 52

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Connecting an analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector to a punch down block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

53 54 54 55 55 56 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 60

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Step 2: Installing circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) . . . . . . . . . Connecting a WAN to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module . . . . . Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module. Connecting an Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an external router to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones

Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access . . .
Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) . . . . . Connecting and enabling a serial modem . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300) Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

63
63 63 68 73 74 74 74 77 78 78 79 79

Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance web pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software upgrades . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6: After installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Testing the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing data connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81 83
83 83 83

Issue 1 January 2008

5

Testing trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSP failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 2: Removing the installation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83 84 85

Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding voice modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding WAN modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the LAN device on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . Recording LAN information for software configuration. Testing the LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

87
87 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 89 89 89 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 92

Adding a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the telephone on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording telephone information for software configuration Testing the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk Connecting the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the trunk on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording trunk information for software configuration Testing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering the WAN line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the WAN line on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording WAN information for software configuration Testing the WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units . . . . . .
Adding or removing G450 main board modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and inserting the G450 main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93
93 93 94 96 97

6 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

. . . . . . . . . . . . Entering values in Server Values worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 99 99 100 100 100 Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware. . . . . Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server. . . . Performing the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server . . . . . . . 101 101 102 102 103 104 104 105 105 106 107 107 108 109 110 111 111 111 112 Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored in NVRAM Failure scenarios and repair actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples . Upgrading the IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). . . . . . . . . . Upgrading considerations . . . . . . . . . 113 114 115 116 117 119 120 121 Issue 1 January 2008 7 . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a TFTP on the LAN . . Setting up a TFTP server . . . Remote configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13: Troubleshooting . USB ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A trunk stops working . . . . . . . . Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup . . . . . MM342 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 LEDs . . . . . . . . Implement the Contact Closure feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM711 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the problem when one phone stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the problem when several phones stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console port (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 ports . Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM710 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch ports (ETH LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Several telephones stop working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM342 media module. . . . . . One telephone stops working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Closure port (CCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 125 125 125 126 126 126 126 127 127 Appendix A: Front panel description . . . . . . . . . . MM710 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router ports (ETH WAN) . . The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server . . . . . Services port (SERVICES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules Media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLI is not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No power on the G450 . . . . . . . . . 131 131 131 132 132 132 132 133 133 133 133 133 134 134 134 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 138 138 138 139 8 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . Configuring the primary controller IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM720 media module. . . . . . . MM720 LEDs . . . . . . Preliminary screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephony configuration . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM716 media module. . . . . . . . . . . 151 151 153 156 156 160 166 173 177 183 186 190 192 193 Issue 1 January 2008 9 . Configuring and upgrading the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading an existing MGC. The front panel of the Avaya MM722 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 ports . . . Accessing Avaya IW . . . MM716 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM717 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying trunk parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM712 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MGC configuration and upgrade options . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM714 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM711 LEDs . . . . . . Modem configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 140 140 140 141 141 141 142 142 143 144 144 145 146 147 147 147 148 148 148 Appendix B: Technical specifications . . . MM714 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MM711 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 149 150 Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 LEDs . . . . . . . . . G450 Media Gateway specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 234 235 235 236 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 239 242 242 245 246 247 247 247 248 INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system . . . . . . . . . . . Connect a modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a trunk . . .Modifying IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the modem . . . . . . . Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call center . . . . . Displaying trunk status . . . . . . . . . . Alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300 upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN . . 209 209 209 230 230 231 231 231 Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for new systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password and final screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local and Phantom Power . . . . . . . Performing a basic configuration of the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 195 196 197 197 198 202 Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary power for an attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test the modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What are the distance limits for the terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . if necessary . . . Configuring a trunk media module Endpoint installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end . . . . Where is the IA770 location and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency. . . . . . Connecting a serial modem . . . UPS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal server installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . . . Typical adjunct power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How is the terminal server cabling connected. . About Avaya G450 announcement software . . Connecting a USB modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) . Administering the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server . . . Administering IP services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Connecting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potential failure scenarios and repair actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware required when configuring modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Issue 1 January 2008 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . Related topics . . . . . . . . Selecting the loopback jack installation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack . . . . . . . . . Connecting CDR equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebooting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What does the RDTT package contain . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer Administering the IOLAN+ the first time . . . . . . . . Checking the integrity of local equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for the presence of DC . Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering CDR data collection. . . . . . Administering CDR parameters. Testing the switch-to-adjunct link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 249 249 252 252 253 253 255 256 256 258 258 258 259 260 261 261 261 261 262 262 262 263 263 263 264 264 264 265 265 265 267 270 270 274 276 277 278 278 Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package . . . . . . . Installing a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurations using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering an IOLAN+ port . . Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack . . . . . . . Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L3 coupler . . . . . G450 Serial Number . . . . . . Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avaya Modular Messaging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems . . . . . . . Paging and announcement equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway . Serial Number and Login Information . . . . . Adjunct Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S. . . . . . . Music-on-hold . . . . . . . . . Avaya Interactive Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 290 291 291 291 292 293 Appendix G: Equipment List . . . . . 278 279 279 279 280 281 281 282 283 284 284 285 285 286 286 287 287 287 287 287 288 Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 305 12 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . Call Accounting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F: Information Checklists . . . . . . . . . .Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installer's Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Site Information. . Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . Administering Multi-Tech modems . . Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations Avaya SIP Enablement Services . . . . . . . . .

2. 5. Click the book title. Access the Avaya Support website at http://www. information can change after we publish this book. Click FIND DOCUMENTATION and TECHNICAL INFORMATION by PRODUCT NAME. personal injury. and security problems. warning. Locate the latest version of the book.avaya. Issue 1 January 2008 13 . Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate. Therefore. Your browser downloads the book. 3. loss of data. equipment damage. However. You can also download these updates from the Avaya Support website. 6. the Avaya Support website might also contain new product information and updates to the information in this book. or an interruption in service. and danger statements to help prevent loss of service.About this book Downloading this book and updates from the Web You can download the latest version of Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway from the Avaya Support website. This book uses the following safety labels and security alert labels: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to software. Safety labels and security alert labels Observe all caution. and a copy of Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer. Downloading this book 1. The search results appear. Type this book’s document number (03-602054) in the Search box. 4. You must have access to the Internet.com/support/. Click GO.

ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: An ESD warning calls attention to situations that can result in ESD damage to electronic components.About this book ! WARNING: WARNING: A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to hardware or equipment. 14 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . ! SECURITY ALERT: SECURITY ALERT: A security alert calls attention to a situation that can increase the potential for unauthorized use of a telecommunications system. ! DANGER: DANGER: A danger statement indicates the presence of a hazard that can result in severe personal injury or death if the hazard is not avoided by following the instructions provided. A warning can also indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause personal injury if the hazard is not avoided by following the instructions provided.

see the following books: Title Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Quick Start for Hardware Installation for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Avaya G450 CLI Reference Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers Number 03-602058 03-602053 03-602055 03-602056 03-300430 03-300431 03-300432 Issue 1 January 2008 15 . Media Gateways and Servers Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Related resources Related resources For more information on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and related features.

Trademarks All trademarks identified by ® or ™ are registered trademarks or trademarks. 16 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. respectively. of Avaya Inc. ● ● International Contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for all international resources. Call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1-800-242-2121 for help with maintenance and repair.About this book Technical assistance Avaya provides resources for technical assistance within the US and internationally. Within the US ● Call the Avaya Technical Consulting Support System at 1-800-225-7585 for help with feature administration and system applications. Call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1-800-643-2353 for help with toll fraud.

send your comments to: 1-303-538-1741 Ensure that you mention the name and number of this book. 03-602054. 120th Ave.Sending us comments Sending us comments Avaya welcomes your comments about this book. Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.com ● Fax. send your comments to: Avaya Inc. Issue 1 January 2008 17 . To reach us by: ● Mail. send your comments to: document@avaya. Westminster. CO 80234 USA ● Email. Product Documentation Group Room B3-H13 1300 W.

About this book 18 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Preparing required equipment Make sure you have the necessary equipment to assist you in the installation before you start working.6 x 0. Before going to site Before going to the site. for verbal communication during remote configuration Equipment required for mounting ● ● ● A crosspoint screwdriver if rack mounting or wall mounting the G450 If you will mount the G450 on a flat wall: screws to fasten the G450 to the wall If you will mount the G450 on a non-flat wall: .Wood screws to fasten the G450 to the plywood .6 m) in size . read this chapter before going to the customer site. If you are installing the G450 at a customer site. if needed.Screws to fasten the plywood board to the wall Issue 1 January 2008 19 . Equipment required for installation ● ● One loop start analog trunk for connecting a modem A separate telephone line.2 cm) thick and at least 2 x 2 ft (0. it is necessary to read the planning documentation and prepare equipment required for installation.Chapter 1: Before you install Read this chapter carefully before you begin the installation.A plywood sheet at least ½ in (1.

● Obtaining the G450 serial number Look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G450 chassis. Obtaining RFA access You need to obtain a personal Single Sign-On (SSO) for Remote Feature Activation (RFA) website authentication login before going to the site for installation. this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site. A modem to connect to the G450 to enable dial-in configuration. it is listed by the Device Manager. One USB CD-ROM drive A laptop computer with MS Internet Explorer ● ● Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server ● ● A PC on the local network.avaya. to create the customer’s license file. services-voice. If the port is recognized. 20 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . As a first-time user: ● Business Partners should point their browsers to the Business Partner portal option sales_market. You must complete the authentication process before you can be assigned an SSO authentication login. log into SSO and complete the process to obtain your personal login. The G450 supports the Multitech MultiModemZBA MT5634ZBA-V-V92 serial modem and the Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the http://rfa. optionally with a USB flash drive A laptop computer running Windows XP or Windows 2000 with a serial port recognized by the operating system on the laptop. ● ● ● From that point.com.com Alternatively go directly to http://rfa.com website. The only supported USB modem is the Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. training tools and procedures to select RFA Associates should point their browsers to the Avaya Associate portal Contractors should point their browsers to Avaya.avaya.Before you install Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server ● One USB modem.

3. 03-300149. 1. Issue 1 January 2008 21 . See Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) and Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW).avaya. obtain a VPN license file from the Remote Feature Activation (RFA). 4. The AFS and RFA information home page appears. follow the instructions outlined in the Avaya Remote Feature Activation (RFA) User Guide. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license files (for example.Before going to site Checking license file and Avaya Communication Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP) If you are installing an S8300 as a Local Survivable Processor (LSP). S8400. the license file for the S8300 must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the server that acts as primary controller (an S8300. Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop If you are installing a G450 with an S8300 Server as a primary controller. you can use either the Avaya Installation Wizard or the Gateway Installation Wizard to install the license file in the G450. The AFS and RFA information home page appears. Start the RFA application from the RFA information page. The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation. 2. Login using your SSO login and password.com. To create and download the license file. it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller. 2. This is necessary so that if control passes to the LSP. Login using your SSO login and password. C:\licenses). 1. you need license and authentication files for the Communication Manager. or S85xx).avaya. 3. Access the Internet from your laptop and go to http://rfa. Once the G450 license file is downloaded to your PC. S87xx. C:\licenses).com. Access the Internet from your laptop and go to http://rfa. Additionally. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example. Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop If you are installing VPN. the LSP must have a version of Avaya Communication Manager (CM) that is identical to that of the primary controller.

and you have an EPW. Alternatively. Access the ART website on your laptop at http://art. if required. which you can set up at the ART website. This IP address is required for configuring remote access to a modem on the S8300 or G450. follow the instructions outlined in the Avaya Remote Feature Activation (RFA) User Guide. In addition. For each procedure. You can use the installation script to automatically set up an IP address and other alarming parameters. To create and download the license file and authentication file. Business Partners call 800-295-0099. Note: ART is available only to Avaya associates. Start the RFA application from the RFA information page. Note: You must generate a license file. and for the S8300– also an authentication file. If you need to configure remote access to both the G450 and the S8300. Non-Avaya personnel must contact their service support or customer care center for INADS addresses. Note: Note: Obtaining the RAS IP address and password 1. 03-300149. If the G450 will be configured using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) or Avaya Installation Wizard (AIW). keep the installation script to run as a CLI command at the configuration stage. follow this procedure twice. The ART information will be imported along with all the other information in the EPW.avaya. Once the Communication Manager license and authentication files are downloaded to your PC. When you run GIW. a script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. You can also use the Maintenance Web Interface to install the Communication Manager license and authentication files. Use the download or email capabilities of the RFA website to download the license and authentication files to your laptop. enter the ART information contained in the installation script into the EPW. Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address The ART tool is a software tool that generates a remote access (RAS) IP address and password. if the G450 will be configured using the CLI. you will have the opportunity to import the Electronic Planning Worksheet (EPW). before you use the ART tool. You need an ART user name and password.Before you install 4. you can use the Avaya Installation Wizard to install them (see Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW).dr. 5. for accessing a product attached to a customer’s modem. once for the G450 and once for the S8300. the ART process is available only to Avaya personnel.com. 22 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

enter the product name. 16. 5. make sure the correct customer provided dial-in number for the G450 Media Gateway appears.Before going to site 2. 14. Click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. 9. ART generates the RAS IP address and password (CHAP secret key) and generates an installation script for the product. ART validates your input and the Customer Validation screen appears. G450. 12. In the INADS field. or Email Installation Script File to have the script emailed to you. enter the customer’s FL number. 4. A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. Click Download Installation Script File to download the installation script to your laptop. Read the customer information displayed. In the Customer Type field. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. or ASG Guard II. 6. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. 11. to check that it is correct. Enter your ART user name and password. CVLAN. 17. In the Product Name field. In the FL Number field. 8. CCS. In the INADS Number field. select Administer an S8xxx. A product list appears. The Start of Installation script & IP Addr Admin screen appears. Click OK. enter the number of the telephone line to which you will connect the modem. In the Product Type field. Keep the RAS IP address and password to configure your modem later. or S8300 SERVER if you want to configure remote access for the S8300. In the Session Type field. select G450 MEDIA GATEWAY if you want to configure remote access for the G450. Issue 1 January 2008 23 . Click the number of the product for which you are configuring remote access. 15. The G450 MEDIA GATEWAY Installation Script Administration Data screen appears. From the User menu. select Other. 10. 13. select Installation Script Administration. The Enter Network Password dialog box appears. 7. 3.

and any Communication Manager service packs that may be required for the upgrade. or placed on a sturdy table. contact your project manager before proceeding with the installation. and should be completed before installation. Download any firmware image file upgrades you need from the Avaya Support website. The G450 may be installed in a 19” rack. Environmental verification Verify that temperatures and clearances are within the recommended technical parameters. obtain the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) from the Avaya Support website at http://support. Consult the table of Technical Specifications in Appendix B: Technical specifications. The humidity should not be higher than 90%. mounted on a wall. Site requirements Inspect the site before you begin the installation. Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) The EPW is an Excel spreadsheet from which Avaya configuration wizards automatically pull data to configure and install the S8300 Server and the G450 Media Gateway. If you find discrepancies between the specifications necessary for proper installation of equipment and the conditions on site. safety. and security conditions.avaya.Before you install Downloading recent firmware Download any recently updated firmware for the G450 and media modules to your laptop. Verify that the site requirements have been met for adequate environmental conditions. For greatest efficiency. Installation instructions are provided in Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. The surrounding temperature should be in the range 0-40°C. The EPW is filled in by the customer and project manager.com/avayaiw. Visit the Avaya Support website to check the latest firmware image file versions against the factory installed versions in the hardware you are installing. 24 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . power and grounding availability.

Power requirements are listed in Power cord specifications on page 150. Issue 1 January 2008 25 . Equipment can be damaged if these restrictions are not respected. Grounding verification Ensure that the installation site has access to approved grounds and that either a trained technician or a licensed electrician will be verifying all grounds and installing the Supplementary Ground Conductor (consult Step 4: Attaching ground conductors). Verify that the G450 Media Gateway and the other equipment in the rack do not present a possible overcurrent or overload to the customer's branch circuit and/or power distribution strip. ! WARNING: WARNING: Do not overload the power circuit. Power verification Check that an adequate number of power outlets are available. The thermal sensors may shut down equipment if it is subjected to conditions beyond the recommended limits.Site requirements ! WARNING: WARNING: Verify that temperature and clearance ranges are within tolerable limits.

the G450 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL). containing: . When you have verified that the site is ready for a safe installation. . contact your project manager. If the power cord provided does not have the correct plug configuration needed in a particular country.One washer for grounding . access to the G450 Media Gateway is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. see the power cord specifications in Appendix B: Technical specifications. An RAL is defined as an access that can be gained only by trained service personnel or customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. the Supplementary Ground Conductor provided with the system provides a non-removable ground even when the AC cords are disconnected. the mains plugs for the power supplies are required to be connected to AC outlets that have earth contacts.Two standard mounting brackets . because of unreliable earthing concerns in Finland.One jumper for bridging NVRAM init pins The Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box. and second.Four rubber feet . Package contents The G450 chassis and accessories are shipped in a box. if ordered.One Supplementary Ground Conductor .Fifteen 3/8” flat head screws . If you have any questions about the safety conditions. Norway.One 5/16” crosspoint screw for grounding . and Sweden. is packaged separately. proceed with the installation.Before you install ! WARNING: WARNING: Installation in a Restricted Access Location and secure access are required in Finland. Norway. and Sweden. One accessories box.One power cord.One mounting bracket with cable guides . However. The package should contain the following items: ● ● One Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. In these cases. The required media modules may be installed. 26 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The G450 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections: first.

If you have any questions about the equipment order. Open the package. such as an unpainted metal surface. Cross-check the customer order with the planning documentation you have been given. contact your project manager. Turn it so that the rear panel is facing up. Connect the strap to an approved ground. Check the contents of the packaging against the customer order. it is recommended to remove the power supply unit(s) before unpacking the G450. If there are missing or damaged elements. Media modules. Placement for the media modules and other equipment are also indicated. 4. a. The planning documentation will list contact information for key personnel. one on each side of the PSU. Place the PSU carefully on the table. Note that the G450 is lying flat. 3. remove them both. 2. Unpack the G450 and accessories. 1. Verify that all necessary elements have been received and are in good condition. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: 2.Package contents Removing power supply units For ease of installation and to enable single-person installation. Unpacking and checking package contents 1. If you ordered two PSUs. telephones and other equipment are listed on your planning and shipping documentation. b. contact your project manager. Grasp the two side handles and pull the PSU up and out. Issue 1 January 2008 27 . Remove the power supply unit (PSU). Loosen the two PSU captive screws. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Wear an anti-static wrist ground strap whenever handling components of an Avaya G450 Media Gateway. or if the equipment has been damaged. c.

Before you install 28 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

You can fasten the G450 to the rack either at the front of the G450 or at the middle. attaching ground conductors. vibration. power supply.) imposed by the United States Navy for use on their ships. The platforms make use of specialized racks and reinforcements. shock. wear an anti-static wrist ground strap. There are two types of mounting brackets provided with the G450: ● ● Without cable guides. contact the Avaya Navy Shipboard Services organization. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: When handling any components of an S8300 Server or G450 Media Gateway. mounting brackets must be attached to the G450. and connecting the power.Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway consists of installing the chassis. These platforms have been tested to meet stringent physical and environmental requirements (i. such as an unpainted metal surface. etc. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Note: Mounting the G450 in a rack The G450 mounts in a standard 19-inch rack. Two mounting brackets without cable guides are provided. EMI. If you wish to obtain information about the design and implementation of such a ruggedized solution. or on a table.. Note: Avaya has developed special hardware platforms for customers with harsh environmental conditions. and media modules. With cable guides. Connect the strap to an approved ground.e. This bracket provides guides for electrical cables and is useful for cable management. In either case. One mounting bracket with cable guides is provided. on a wall. Issue 1 January 2008 29 . Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis You can mount the G450 in a rack.

Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Brackets without cable guides Mounting brackets without cable guides can be attached in either of the following positions: ● ● To each side of the front of the G450 for fastening the unit to the rack at the front To the middle of each side panel of the G450 for fastening the chassis to the rack at the middle Figure 1: Attaching a mounting bracket to the front of the G450 Figure 2: Attaching a mounting bracket to the middle of the G450 Brackets with cable guides You can attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the front of the G450 at one side. use the mounting bracket with cable guides at the front of the chassis. as shown in the following figure. the mounting bracket with cable guides serves for cable management only — you do not fasten it to the rack. in addition to the two regular mounting brackets on the sides of the chassis. If you are fastening the chassis to the rack at the front. 30 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . In this case. If you are fastening the chassis to the rack at the middle. use the mounting bracket with cable guides as one of the two front brackets.

Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis Note: Note: It is recommended to attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the left side of the rack. do not proceed with the installation.5 kg) empty and between 37. Note: The G450 weighs 21 pounds (9. Position a bracket over the desired mounting position. to avoid balancing problems and cabling complications. to support the weight of the amphenol cable you will connect to the MM717 media module. the G450 must be positioned to avoid imbalance. See Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module on page 52.5 and 39. If the G450 is being mounted in a rack with other equipment already installed. Tighten with a screwdriver. that is. so that the cables will not interfere in case you replace the fan tray. and two Power Supply Units. an S8300 Server. If the rack is not securely fixed in place. ● Note: Issue 1 January 2008 31 .5 pounds (between 17 and 18 kg) when equipped with media modules. Fill racks from the bottom. if you are installing an MM717 or MM716 media module. 1. However. mount units in the lower positions first. Before mounting the G450 ● Ensure that the rack is bolted to the floor and is earthquake-protected. 3. if required. 2. Figure 3: Attaching a mounting bracket with cable guides Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450 The G450 is held in place by mounting screws through the two mounting ears. attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the right side of the rack. Affix the bracket to the chassis with five of the fifteen 6-32 x 3/8 screws provided.

Position the G450 in the rack. Verify that ventilation vents are not obstructed. as explained in Brackets with cable guides on page 30. 4. 5. Ensure that there is adequate ventilation. so that a part of them is protruding. 6. Use lifting precautions. Avoid overtightening. you have mounted the G450 chassis in the rack and are ready to insert media modules as required in the planning documentation. 1. Either tighten the two bottom-most screws inserted in step 1. 3. Position the G450 in the rack so that the bottoms of the brackets are resting on the protruding screws.Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Mounting the G450 in the rack The G450 is designed for single-person mounting. Insert two mounting screws. A minimum of two installers is required to wall-mount a G450. It weighs 30 pounds (13. ! CAUTION: CAUTION: A fully loaded G450 weighs 40 pounds (18 kg). one on either side of the rack. Turn the screws only 3-4 times. Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting Attach a bracket to each side of the G450. These will be the bottom screws of the mounting brackets. 2. You can also add a mounting bracket with cable guides if desired. ! WARNING: WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to wall-mount the G450. 32 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .4 kg) if both power supply units were removed. use the two mounting brackets without cable guides. This assumes that the power supplies were removed (see Removing power supply units on page 27). or remove them completely. At this point. Tighten the rack mounting screws. 7. two on each side. Insert four rack mounting screws. Mounting the G450 on a wall To mount the G450 on a wall. as shown in the figure below.

and secure it to the plywood using a minimum of four screws (pan head at least ½ in. mount a plywood sheet at least ½ in (1. first insert the power supply unit(s) if you removed them before installation (refer to Removing power supply units on page 27). 2. 1. Placing the G450 on a table If you will be installing the G450 as a tabletop unit. 2. near each corner of the chassis. Issue 1 January 2008 33 . If the wall does not have a portion of plywood available. horizontally onto the wall. 3.Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units Figure 4: Attaching a bracket to each side of the G450 Fastening the G450 to the wall The plywood and the hardware to mount the plywood are installer-provided. Use a minimum of four wood screws and ensure the screws are driven into wall studs. # 10-12 screw).2 cm) thick and at least 2 x 2 ft (0.6 m) in size. 1. Position each foot into one of the mounting sites. Remove the four feet from their packaging. Position the G450 so that its front panel is facing up. Mark the plywood with the location of the G450 bracket screw holes before fastening the plywood to the wall. you need to affix the provided rubber feet to the underside of the G450. Make sure the plywood screws are sufficiently anchored in the wall. Turn the G450 upside down. 3. or use four wall anchors rated not less than 50 pounds (22.5 kg) shear strength each. Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units When the G450 chassis is installed.6 x 0.

Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 1. one on each side of the PSU. See Combination limitations on page 35. Figure 5: Inserting the power supply unit Step 3: Installing the media modules When the G450 chassis is installed and the power supply unit(s) have been inserted. If this is the case. ● 34 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Read this section only if the media modules are not pre-installed. Note: The required media modules are sometimes pre-installed in the G450 chassis. See Allocating slots on page 35. you can insert the media modules. Close and tighten the two PSU captive screws. 3. Position the power supply unit before the opening at the rear of the G450 and engage both sides of the PSU in the interior guides. skip this step. 2. Each module is shipped with two thumb screws for securing the position of the module in the G450 chassis. Allocate a permissible slot to each media module. maintaining an even pressure to assure that the PSU does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. or if you want to replace modules or add new media modules. Slide the PSU slowly into the chassis. Note: Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis ● Do not install an unsupported combination of media modules.

Allocate a slot for the media module. V4. V2. and V8 on the G450 front panel. V3. Combination limitations The following limitations apply to combining media modules in the G450: ● ● 3 MM340/MM342 WAN modules The MM760 is not supported Allocating slots You insert media modules into the slots marked V1. Issue 1 January 2008 35 . Failure to cover empty slots with the supplied blank plates can cause overheating due to inadequate air distribution.Step 3: Installing the media modules ! WARNING: WARNING: The Avaya G450 Media Gateway must not be operated with any open slots. shown in Figure 6 below. Make sure your slot allocations allow a permissible slot for every media module. V6. V5. V7.

9. V8 — slot for standard media module Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules Media module MM340 MM342 MM710 MM711 MM712 MM714 Permitted slots V3. V2 — slot for standard media module 13. V3 — slot for standard media module 14. 5. 10.Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Figure 6: The G450 front panel ports and slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Figure notes: 1. V1 — slot for standard media module or S8300 Server 12. Provides eight ports for connecting DCP telephones. V6 — slot for standard media module 17. V8 V3. 8. System LEDs USB ports Console port Services port ETR (Emergency Transfer Relay) port CCA (Contact Closure) port ETH WAN ports ETH LAN ports RST button ASB button 11. Provides eight universal analog ports for connecting analog telephones or trunks. V8 V1 – V8 V1 – V8 V1 – V8 V1 – V8 Description Provides one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. V7 — slot for standard media module 18. 3. Provides one E1/T1 trunk port for connecting an E1/T1 telephone trunk. V5 — slot for standard media module 16. V4. Provides four analog ports for analog telephones and four analog ports for analog trunks. 4. 7. 6. V4 — slot for standard media module 15. V4. 1 of 2 36 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Provides one USP WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. 2.

If you are inserting an S8300/B module. remove the plate above slot V1. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment. 3. maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. Server 2 of 2 MM720 MM722 S8300B/S8300C V1 – V8 V1 – V8 V1 Inserting the S8300 Server module The S8300 can only be inserted in slot V1 on the left side of the G450 Media Gateway. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly. 1. Provides eight ports for connecting up to eight ISDN trunks or 16 ISDN BRI stations. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. or if misaligned and then forced into position. 4. Position the media module before the V1 bay opening and engage both sides of the module in the interior guides. 2. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. ! CAUTION: CAUTION: Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the spring-loaded captive screws. Issue 1 January 2008 37 . wear an anti-static wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag. Provides two ports for connecting ISDN trunks. Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a punch down block to provide 24 ports for connecting DCP telephones.Step 3: Installing the media modules Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules (continued) Media module MM716 MM717 Permitted slots V1 – V8 V1 – V8 Description Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a punch down block to provide 24 analog line ports. Slide the S8300 module slowly into the chassis. labelled “Remove before removing or inserting S8300 module”. Remove the blank plate from slot V1. If possible.

all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. 7. 5. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot. 6. Lock the S8300 Server module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on the front of the module. replace the plate labelled “Remove before removing or inserting S8300 module” above slot V1 and tighten the screws on the front of the plate. If you are inserting an S8300/B module. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. 38 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal. After you have inserted the S8300 Server module. ! DANGER: DANGER: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to radiated emissions requirements. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. if applicable.Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Figure 7: Inserting the S8300 Server module. The connector has different length pins. insert the rest of the media modules.

ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly. Remove the blank plate from the empty bay. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. The media module connector has different length pins. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. or if misaligned and then forced into position. If possible. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. insert the rest of the media modules. Issue 1 January 2008 39 . Figure 8: Inserting a media module 3. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. Position the media module before the selected bay on the front of the G450 chassis and engage both sides of the module in the interior guides. 1. if applicable. wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.Step 3: Installing the media modules Inserting media modules After you have inserted the S8300 Server module. maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. 2. Slide the module slowly into the chassis. ! CAUTION: CAUTION: Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the spring-loaded captive screws. Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal.

Step 4: Attaching ground conductors To assure safe installation and operation. use that cord whenever possible. WARNING. ! WARNING: WARNING: After you have connected telephones to the various media modules. Pay special attention to all CAUTION. If this location requirement is not met. and instructions. ! WARNING: WARNING: System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). Lock the media module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on the front of the module. carefully read all requirements. the customer must contact a licensed electrician to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor per Article 250 40 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . General grounding requirements Two safety grounds are required to ensure safe operation of the G450 Media Gateway: the ground conductor that is part of the AC power cord and the field-installed green/yellow conductor referred to as the Supplementary Ground Conductor. recommendations. ! DANGER: DANGER: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to international radiated emissions requirements.Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 4. or the applicable electrical code in the country of installation. If a power cord accompanies the G450. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70. Installation location The customer must select a location for the G450 Media Gateway installation that is no more than 50 ft (15 m) from an approved ground. Both safety grounds must be connected to an approved ground. and DANGER statements. be sure to add circuit protection to the lines. all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool.

! WARNING: WARNING: If the installation location is greater than 50 ft (15 m) from an approved ground. Restricted Access Location In Finland. If the ground block is to be used. with an insulated ring terminal crimped to one end that is suitable for the #8 (M4) stud/screw on the rear of the G450 chassis. Issue 1 January 2008 41 . has ten terminals available for terminating Supplementary Ground Conductors. Ground conductor A Supplementary Ground Conductor is provided with the equipment. ! DANGER: DANGER: Failure to install both grounds will void the Product Safety certifications (UL and the CE Mark) on the product. and Sweden.0 mm2) wire.Step 4: Attaching ground conductors of the National Electrical Code (NEC). and is constructed of 10 AWG (4. A Restricted Access Location is defined as access that can be gained by only Service Personnel or Customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. it must be ordered separately. Ground block A ground block is available for use when multiple G450 Media Gateways are being installed. the G450 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted Access Location. Up to ten G450 Media Gateways can be grounded at the block installed close to the equipment (on a rack) and then a single ground conductor can be routed from the same block to an approved ground. do not install the Avaya G450 Media Gateway until a licensed electrician is present to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor. intended for rack mounting. as well as allow a hazard to be present that could result in death or severe personal injury. Norway. In these cases. due to unreliable earthing concerns. The customer will need to provide a means of connecting this Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground according to Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). access to the G450 is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. The ground block.

the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250-81 of the NEC for the US or per the local electrical code regulations in the country of installation. ● ● 42 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .3 cm) in diameter. entrance cable shield.Rod and pipe electrodes. at least 1/2 in (1. such as tanks and piping systems.1 cm) of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth.76 m) below the earth’s surface. Acceptable Water Pipe. Approved floor grounds may include the following: . Ground Ring.1 m) of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods.Other local metal underground systems or structures. a concrete-encased ground. If these grounds are not available. Approved grounds An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector. plastic pipe. m) of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil.6 cm) solid rod or 3/4 in (2 cm) conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 ft (2. ft (0. ● ● Concrete Encased Ground. concrete encased ground. the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds: . If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises. The ground ring must be at least 20 ft (6. or a single-point ground of electronic telephony equipment. bare copper wire. the Avaya G450 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections (mains plug with an earth contact and a Supplementary Ground Conductor). .1 m) of bare solid copper. A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building. The pipe must be electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints. The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by one of the following grounds: acceptable metallic water pipe.4 m). A metal underground water pipe.5 ft (0.Building steel. or plastic water meters) to the point where the protector ground wire connects. A 5/8 in (1. Approved Floor Grounds. The electrode must be at least 20 ft (6. 4 AWG (26 mm2) wire. ● Grounded Building Steel.Plate electrodes. .Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway ! WARNING: WARNING: For installations in Finland. Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high-rise building that are suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet single-point ground terminal. Must have a minimum of 2 sq. in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft (3m). 1/2 in (1. or at least 20 ft (6. and Sweden.3 cm) in diameter. Norway.1 m) of 2 AWG (35 mm2). An electrode encased by at least 2 in (5. or a ground ring.185 sq. or a ground ring. A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2.

A grounding point specifically provided in the building for that purpose. and electrostatic discharge (ESD). Attaching the ground wires 1. Cut the Supplementary Ground Conductor (which has one end attached to the grounding screw on the chassis) to the length needed to terminate it into one of the terminals of the ground block. Do not coil the Supplementary Ground Conductor. ! WARNING: WARNING: An improper ground can cause electrical shock as well as equipment failures and service outages. . power crosses on central office trunks. 2.The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor. Local electrical installation codes must be followed when installing the G450. Issue 1 January 2008 43 .Metallic water pipes. then connections to this ground must be made by a licensed electrician. Place the ring terminal of the 10 AWG (4. Insert the ground screw on the rear of the chassis adjacent to the ground symbol and securely tighten the screw such that it cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. AC mains faults. ! DANGER: DANGER: Connection of both grounds (through the AC Power Cord and the Supplementary Ground Conductor) is required for safe operation of the G450 Media Gateway. If the ground block has been purchased 1. ! WARNING: WARNING: If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room.0 mm2) Supplementary Ground Conductor on the ground screw that was provided in the accessories box. users. power surges. Connecting the safety ground Proper grounding of the G450 Media Gateway installation safeguards the system. Attach one end of the remaining 10 AWG (4 mm2) ground wire to one of the terminals in the ground block and the other end to an approved ground. .Step 4: Attaching ground conductors . 2. .Power-feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor. and service personnel by providing protection from lightning.

Plug the power cable into a mains socket. At least one LED on each media module. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the G450 back panel. installed the media modules. except the S8300. Connect the AC power cable to the inlet receptacle on the rear of the chassis. Note: The ground block is provided for use with more than one G450 in the rack. and stays on if both PSUs are connected to power. 3. Note: If two PSUs are installed in the G450.Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 3. The PWR LED on the front panel lights. The CPU LED lights up if the firmware is running. The G450 can be ordered with either one or two power supply units. you can connect it to power by repeating steps 1 and 2. Attach the Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground. 1. Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 After you have mounted the G450. Do not coil this wire. If you have a second power supply unit. Note: If the ground block is not being used 1. you can connect power to the G450. installed the PSU(s). Note: 44 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . and attached grounding conductors. lights up initially and then goes off after about 20 seconds. The G450 is now powered. Cut this ground wire to the length needed to reach the approved ground. 2. It is usually mounted by the customer electrician. the PWR LED blinks if only one PSU is connected to power. 2.

Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 PWR LED indications The PWR LED on the power supply unit indicates the operational status of the power supply unit. Table 2: Power Supply Unit PWR LED LED PWR Name Power State On On Off Color Green Red Indication Power is OK A power fault The PSU unit is broken or not powered Issue 1 January 2008 45 .

Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 46 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

lorsque vous connectez des téléphones. See your planning documentation for any topology requirements to connect specific devices to specific ports. Pour réduire les risques d'incendie. or connecting to any media module telecommunication ports. WARNING: Attention: Pour réduire les risques d’incendie. keep a record of the slots and ports into which specific devices are connected. the G450 should be mounted and all media modules should be inserted. As you connect devices. ! WARNING: Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices There are various possible ways of connecting different devices. des équipements complémentaires. Connecting a switch or a network data port The G450 can provide network switching and also supports the connection of switches. You will need this information when configuring the G450. veuillez n'utiliser que des fils de lignes télécommmunications de 26 AWG ou de section supérieure. ou pour toute connexion aux ports télécommunications d'une quelconque carte d'équipement. You can connect the following to either of the ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel: ● ● One or more LAN switches The network data ports in the office Issue 1 January 2008 47 . utiliser uniquement des conductors de télécommmunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure. ! WARNING: WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire. use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords when installing telephones or adjuncts.Chapter 3: Connecting devices External endpoint devices can be connected to the ports on the front panels of the installed media modules and to the fixed front panel ports. Before you connect endpoint devices.

If the telephone is not an Avaya IP telephone.Connecting devices Connecting a computer to the Services port A laptop connected directly to the Services port of the G450 or S8300 Server requires a specific configuration of its network settings. see Appendix B. ● Note: Configure TCP/IP properties.6 in the Exceptions box. Unless you use the NetSwitcher program or an equivalent. Set the laptop's TCP/IP properties as follows: . DNS servers.11. Use your computer's help system if needed to locate the correct place to enter the configuration information.5 . This port is labeled 10/5 or 10/6. or WINS entries that you change when you configure your services laptop. Connect the IP telephone to an external Ethernet switch. This switch must be connected to a LAN port on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.6. Note the slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which you connect the telephone.11.13. ● ● Note: Connecting an IP telephone Note: Note: For a full list of supported phones. you will need to restore these entries to connect to other networks. Access the G450 or S8300 Server using the URL http://192. Server address.255.Disable DNS service . you can connect it to any port on the network switch.Subnet mask: 255. Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.255.11.13.Disable WINS Resolution Configure browser settings.252 . Configure the laptop’s browser for a direct connection to the Internet. Either disable/bypass proxy servers. Note: Make a record of any IP addresses.IP address: 192. 03-602058. 48 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . or enter 192. Note: The names of the dialog boxes and buttons vary on different operating systems and browser releases.13.

you do not need to plug the IP telephone into a power supply. Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port 1. Note: Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port Connect the station via a standard 8-pin BRI cable to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720 Media Module. 2. and one RJ-45 male connector. Wire a telephone port to a port on the switch connected to the G450 LAN port. if the MM720 BRI Media Module is administered to support BRI stations. Connect the male connector of the splitter to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720 Media Module. the MM720 BRI Media Module does not support combining both B-channels together to form a 128-kbps channel. If the IP telephone will be powered independently. it cannot be used as a clock synchronization source. Connecting an ISDN BRI station Each ISDN port on the MM720 Media Module supports up to two ISDN BRI stations. Finally.If the switch is a PoE switch. plug the IP telephone into a power supply and check that the IP telephone is powered up. Plug the telephone into the telephone port. See Figure 9 for the correct wiring for the splitter. Issue 1 January 2008 49 . 2. Connect each station to an RJ-45 splitter that provides two RJ-45 4-pair jacks. 3. Note: The MM720 BRI Media Module cannot be administered to support both BRI trunks and BRI stations at the same time.Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices Connecting the telephone to the G450 1. Also.

. Wire a telephone port to one of the following analog ports: .A universal analog port on an MM711 media module .A LINE port on an MM714 media module 2. 50 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . 03-602058. 1. see Appendix B.Connecting devices Figure 9: RJ-45 splitter wiring for connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port Figure 10: The MM720 media module Connecting an analog telephone Note: Note: For a full list of supported phones. Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55. To connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable telephone connection. Plug the analog telephone into the telephone port.Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module.

1 REN (electronic ringers): .000 ft for 24 AWG wire .Up to 20. and 22 AWG wire Issue 1 January 2008 51 .For modern phone equipment with a ringer load below 0.Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices Figure 11: The MM711 media module Figure 12: The MM714 media module Figure 13: The MM716 media module Note: Note: Analog line ports support the following maximum distances: .000 ft for 26 AWG wire .000 ft for 22 AWG wire .Up to 20.Up to 10. 24 AWG.Up to 16.For phone equipment with a ringer load above 3 REN (old mechanical ringers): .000 ft for 26 AWG.

03-602058. To connect the MM717 media module to a punch down block to enable telephone connection. Wire a telephone port to a DCP port on the G450.MM717. 24 DCP ports. see Appendix B. 1. The following media modules provide DCP telephone ports: . Plug the DCP telephone into the telephone port.Connecting devices Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module Note: Note: For a full list of supported phones. 52 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55. provided via a single 25-pair amphenol socket on the front panel. 8 DCP ports . Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.MM712. Figure 14: The MM712 media module Figure 15: The MM717 media module 2.

you cannot use a TRUNK port on an MM714 media module. Connect the trunk to one of the following ports: .Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module. Instead. all DCP media modules are intended for in-building use only.Up to 3500 ft for 24 AWG wire . or MM716 media module. see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55.Up to 5500 ft for 22 AWG wire . To connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable trunk connection.Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices ! WARNING: WARNING: With the exception of the MM712.One of the ports marked TRUNK on an MM714 media module Note: For an analog DID trunk. Note: The MM716 media module does not support analog CO or CAMA trunks. Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and equipment. Note: Note: Issue 1 January 2008 53 . Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed out-of-building. MM714.Up to 2200 ft for 26 AWG wire Connecting an analog trunk 1. you must connect the trunk to one of the ports marked LINE on an MM711. .Any universal analog port on an MM711 media module . Note: Note: The MM712 and MM717 and media modules support the following maximum loop lengths: .

Connecting devices Connecting an E1/T1 trunk Connect the trunk cable to the E1/T1 port on an MM710 media module. The SIG LED lights. Note: Figure 17: The MM720 media module Figure 18: The MM722 media module 54 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . you need to connect a separately purchased NT1 device to each ISDN port you use to connect an ISDN BRI trunk. Figure 16: The MM710 media module Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk Connect the trunk to any ISDN port on an MM720 or MM722 media module. Note: In the US.

You can terminate up to 24 endpoint devices on the connected punch down block.) 2. For the pin-out of the 25-pair connector.Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules The MM716 and MM717 media modules do not support direct connection of telephones or other endpoint devices. 3. Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector to a punch down block 1. You can now connect endpoint devices to the RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks. Figure 19: Attaching and securing the amphenol cable to the MM716 or MM717 25-pair socket 5. intended for use with a punch down block. 4. Fasten the tie wrap around the cable to secure the cable to the right side of the front panel socket. Connect one end of a CAT5 cable with a 25-pair amphenol connector at each end to the 25-pair socket on the MM716 or MM717 front panel. Connect the other end of the amphenol cable to a punch down block that converts the single amphenol connector to 24 RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks. see Table 18. as needed. Thread a tie wrap through the small bracket to the right of the front panel socket. so that the cable extends to the right of the G450. (The cable you use must be such that the connector you plug into the media module is 90° to the cable. Issue 1 January 2008 55 . Tighten the end screw of the amphenol connector to securely fasten the connector to the left side of the front panel socket. The MM716 and MM717 media modules each have a single 25-pair amphenol socket on the front panel. Connect the front panel connector to a punch down block.

The following devices have been evaluated or tested and approved to protect the media modules from over-voltages and sneak current protection: ● For the Avaya MM710 or MM340 T1/E1. Tie trunk applications require either the 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75 solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current. ● ● ● ● 56 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . 146C (4-lines) or 146F (25-lines) For the Avaya MM712 DCP: either 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75 solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current.Gas tube with heat coil. Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over-voltage and sneak current protection at both building entry points: . 4B1E-W . Over-voltage and sneak current protection for these interfaces is provided on the media modules/interfaces. Incoming trunks normally have over-voltage protection provided by the local telephone company. Over-voltage and sneak current protection for the Avaya MM710 and MM340 are provided on the media modules themselves.Connecting devices Step 2: Installing circuit protection Out-of-building installations of telephones or other standard (tip/ring) devices/terminals that connect to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Media Modules require over-voltage and sneak current protection in both buildings.IROB. For the Avaya MM711. and MM716 Analog. MM714. For the Avaya MM720 ISDN-BRI: network-side applications require an NT-1 device. 4C1S . Field installed sneak current protectors must have a maximum current rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600V.Solid state with heat coil. For the Avaya MM722 ISDN-BRI: over-voltage and sneak current protection are provided on the media modules themselves.

Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and equipment.21 Figure 20: The MM342 media module Issue 1 January 2008 57 . use one of the following cable types. ! WARNING: Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) Since the G450 contains an internal router. depending on the service provider’s equipment: ● ● Avaya Serial Cable DTE V. You can also connect a WAN endpoint device to the G450 via an external router. depending on the type of WAN link you are connecting. To connect the WAN line to the port. you can connect the G450 directly to a WAN endpoint device.35 Avaya Serial Cable DTE X. Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module You must connect the WAN link to a device connected to the Avaya MM342 media module. Connecting a WAN to the G450 There are some differences in how to connect the WAN. all DCP media modules are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed out-of-building.Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) ! WARNING: WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to install these circuit protection devices. To connect the WAN link. plug the WAN line into the USP port on the MM342 media module. This port is marked USP. WARNING: With the exception of the MM712.

In a high-rise building. plug the WAN line into the E1/T1 port on the MM340 media module. Use an unshielded twisted pair cable.) to the Ethernet WAN port on the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. Use a CAT5 Ethernet cable to connect the WAN line to the port. This port is marked ETH WAN. firewall. a metal cable shield around the exposed cables. The conductor can be a 10 AWG (4 mm2) wire tie wrapped to the exposed cables. Connecting an external router to the G450 You can connect a router to any of the following ports on the G450: ● ● The ETH WAN ports on the G450 front panel The ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) provides mutual inductance coupling between the CBC and the telephone cables that are exposed to lightning. connect the CBC to an approved building ground on each floor.Connecting devices Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module To connect the WAN link. This port is marked E1/T1. depending on the WAN equipment. Figure 21: The MM340 media module Connecting an Ethernet WAN link You must connect the Ethernet WAN line (DSL. etc. 58 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . or six spare pairs from the exposed cable. See Figure 6. straight or crossover.

such as a telephone. Note: Position the non-exposed telephone cables at least 12 in (30. 3. Connect the Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box to the CC port on the G450 front panel. To implement the contact closure feature. Note: Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct The Contact Closure feature is a controllable relay providing dry contacts for various applications. The adjunct box provides two contact closures that can be operated in either a “normally closed” or “normally open” state. 3. 1. 2. The CCA port can be configured so that the connected devices can be controlled by an end device. Use a 24 gauge minimum telephone wire. with a standard four wire RJ-11 connector. Route the rest of the conductor next to the exposed telephone cables being protected until they reach the cross-connect nearest to the telephone system. For example. The contact closures can control auxiliary devices such as devices that automatically lock or unlock doors or voice recording units. be sure the telephone lines are cross-connected to the appropriate media module(s). Installing the contact closure 1. you connect an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct box to the CCA port on the G450 chassis. 2.Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct Installing the CBC Before you begin. Follow the installation instructions in the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct Installation Instructions leaflet to install the Contact Closure and connect the auxiliary devices that will be activated and deactivated by the Contact Closure relays. Connect one end of the conductor to a telephone cable building entrance protector ground that is connected to an approved ground. Issue 1 January 2008 59 . Terminate the other end to the single-point ground block provided for the telephone system.5 cm) away from exposed telephone cables whenever possible. no longer than 200 ft. a user can unlock a door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad. Note which device is connected to each relay. You will need this information for configuration.

When ETR is activated. such as a power outage or a failed connection to the MGC. A current-loop detection circuit prevents ongoing calls from being disconnected when normal functioning resumes. For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel. The trunk port and analog line port passing through the ETR panel do not start to operate until the active call ends. You can cascade a second ETR panel. If a call is in progress on an outside line when the problem ends. which ships with the Emergency Transfer Panel. MM714. all calls are directed by the analog relays between the outside lines and the analog telephones. or MM716). one ETR panel supports up to five emergency lines. providing support for up to 10 emergency analog phones. 03-602518. the call continues. The ETR feature can be used in conjunction with an analog media module (MM711. The ETR panel provides up to five incoming Central Office (CO) trunk loops to 5 selected G450 analog lines.Connecting devices Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones The ETR feature provides basic telephone services in the event of system failure. see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Installation Instructions. Thus. ETR is activated automatically upon system failure by closing the tip/ring contacts between the analog lines and the analog trunks. 60 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

08A TRUNK / TEST SWITCHES CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 1 2 LOOP START GROUND START 25-PAIR MALE CONNECTOR TRUNK TYPE SELECTION SWITCHES 1 2 3 4 5 TRUNK OPTION: BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE TRUNK OPTION NORMAL OPERATION TEST SWITCH TRANSFER TEST SWITCH ACTIVATED TRUNK IDENTIFICATION TRUNK LINE TRUNK IDENTIFICATION LABEL EXT LOC 808A cycmfig1 LAO 082107 Issue 1 January 2008 61 .Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones Figure 22: 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Emergency Transfer Panel CABLE RETAINER LED POWER RATING -48V DC 0.

Connecting devices 62 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Note: Note: Issue 1 January 2008 63 . since more features are preserved. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web. Modem dial backup allows for more superior survivability than switching to a secondary MGC. which provides a redundant connectivity with a remote primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC). Note: If you choose to configure the G450 by running an installation wizard. you can enable a modem with the wizard as part of the configuration. Note: Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) You can either connect a serial modem to the CON port on the G450 front panel or you can connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel. You do not need to read this chapter. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades. If an S8300 is installed in the G450. Connecting and enabling a serial modem 1. A serial modem connected to the G450 can also be used for the modem dial backup feature. Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP. you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server.Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access You can connect a modem to the G450 to enable configuration from a remote location. leave a modem connected permanently to enable reporting of alarms to remote locations. Instructions for connecting the modem are included in Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151 and in Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209.

4. 9. Download Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) from the Avaya Support website (support. Click Continue. Figure 23: COM Port Selection screen 8. Select the COM port on the laptop that you are using to connect to the G450.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access 2. The G450 Wizard Usage Options screen appears. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 3. The COM Port Selection screen appears. 6. 64 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. 7. Click Continue. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. From your laptop computer.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. 5. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. The Overview screen appears.avaya.

11. Select Enable the modem for remote installation.Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) Figure 24: G450 Wizard Usage Options screen 10. Issue 1 January 2008 65 . Click Continue. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears.

13.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Figure 25: G450 Modem Type Selection screen 12. 66 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Select Serial Modem. The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen appears. Click Continue.

enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool. . check Enable ASG Authentication to enable remote access to the device. 16. In the IP Address field. If you do not have an Avaya Service contract: . Select the authentication method: ● If you have an Avaya Service contract.Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) Figure 26: G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen 14. The Connect Modem screen appears. . Click Continue. 15.Check Enable CHAP Authentication. enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool. Issue 1 January 2008 67 . See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. re-enter the CHAP secret key.In the CHAP Secret field. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. Fill in the remaining modem information fields.In the Confirm CHAP Secret field. ● 17.

Click Finish. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem. Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300) You can enable a MultiTech MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem on a USB port on the G450 front panel. 1. 20. Note: 68 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem. 19. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades. 21.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Figure 27: Connect Modem screen 18. Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. 22.

The COM Port Selection screen appears. you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server.avaya. 9.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. Note: Figure 28: COM Port Selection screen 8. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. The Overview screen appears. Click Continue. 4. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. From your laptop computer. double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. 6. 5. 3. 7.Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) Note: Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP. Select the COM port on the laptop that you are using to connect to the G450. Click Continue. The G450 Wizard Usage Options screen appears. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web. 2. Issue 1 January 2008 69 . Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website (support.

Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Figure 29: G450 Wizard Usage Options screen 10. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears. 11. Click Continue. 70 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Select Enable the modem for remote installation.

The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen appears. Click Continue.Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) Figure 30: G450 Modem Type Selection screen 12. Issue 1 January 2008 71 . Select USB Modem. 13.

See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. 16. If you do not have an Avaya Service contract: . ● 17. .In the Confirm CHAP Secret field. The Connect Modem screen appears. enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Figure 31: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen 14. Click Continue.In the CHAP Secret field. In the PPP IP Address field. . Select the authentication method: ● If you have an Avaya Service contract. check Enable ASG Authentication to enable remote access to the device.Check Enable CHAP Authentication. 15. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask. re-enter the CHAP secret key. 72 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool.

Issue 1 January 2008 73 . 20. Note: Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300) Dial into the modem to verify that you can authenticate to the modem. 19.Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) Figure 32: Connect Modem screen 18. 21. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel. Click Finish.

and browse to 192.252 disable do not use (clear out any values) Table 4: Internet Browser Settings Setting Proxy Server Value disable 3. Maintenance web pages Most of the preparations you are making require you to access the Maintenance web pages part of Avaya Integrated Management (AIM) from your laptop. 4. Open Internet Explorer. After accessing the Maintenance web pages. The welcome screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears.5 255.11. The Logon screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) You can connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel.11. 74 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Connect the laptop you prepared to the Services port on the S8300.255.13. Click Continue. Accessing the Maintenance web pages 1.13. Use a standard Ethernet crossover cable. leave the Maintenance web pages open until you have completed all the preparations. 2.6. according to the following tables: Table 3: TCP/IP settings Setting IP Address Subnet Mask DNS WINS Servers Value 192.255. Configure the network settings on the laptop.

Issue 1 January 2008 75 . and click Logon. Enter your password in the password field.Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) Figure 33: Integrated Management Logon screen 5. Click Logon. The password field appears. The main menu for Avaya Integrated Management appears. 6. Enter your S8300 initial entry username in the Logon ID box. 7.

From the Integrated Management main menu. The Maintenance Web Pages Notice page appears.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access Figure 34: Integrated Management Main Menu 8. with a navigation menu at the left. select Launch Maintenance Web Interface. 76 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Click Continue. From the left navigation menu. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up the current data. Select Configure individual services. The Back Up Data page appears. 7. Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Page 1. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. Enter the RAS IP address you obtained using the ART tool. 3. 5. 6. Click Continue. Leave the Maintenance Web Pages open to perform the tasks described in the coming sections. click Set Modem Interface. Select Configure Server from the left-hand menu on the Maintenance web page.Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) Figure 35: Maintenance Web Pages Notice page 9. 2. The Set Modem Interface page appears. Issue 1 January 2008 77 . 4.

connect the USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module. 9. 78 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . you must connect the USB modem to the S8300. The Modem page appears. After the G450 is configured. Note: Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) If your installation includes an S8300 Server module. Connect the USB modem to a working telephone line. Click Close Window. you can leave the modem permanently connected to enable the S8300 to report alarms to remote locations. 3. Note: Connecting and enabling the modem 1. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages. Note: You can only change the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Pages if you have an Avaya Maintenance contract. Click Submit. 5. Figure 36: Modem page 4.Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access 8. Connect the modem to one of the USB ports on the S8300 module. Click Continue. 10. 2. select Security > Modem. Select Enable modem for unlimited incoming calls. Note: If you require a USB CD-ROM drive to download software upgrades. Click Change modem settings.

provide the rasaccess login and password in the Terminal Window.Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300) 1. If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software upgrades Connect the USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module. Security > Show Terminal Window. Close the Terminal Window to complete the connection. Password. Setup a dialup connection on a remote PC with the following settings: ● ● ● Automatically detect settings. When prompted. 3. 4. Dial in to the modem from the remote PC. No Username. or Domain. 2. Issue 1 January 2008 79 .

Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access 80 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

The CLI is a comprehensive tool for configuring the gateway and includes all supported configuration tasks. ● ● The G450 can be configured at the customer site via a laptop connected to the CON port or Services port of the G450. 03-602055. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port. 03-602056. For detailed information on CLI commands. Refer to Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. Avaya IW is a wizard that prompts you for all configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). You can run GIW to configure a G450 without an S8300.Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 The G450 requires software configuration. see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. Refer to Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151. refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. The GIW is a wizard that prompts you for all configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. The Avaya G450 Command Line Interface (CLI). The G450 can be configured using: ● The Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW). Avaya IW is used only to configure a G450 with an S8300. refer to the Avaya G450 CLI Reference. or from a remote location via a modem. refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Issue 1 January 2008 81 . For information about connecting and enabling a modem. For information about configuration using the CLI.

Configuring the G450 82 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Testing trunks Use the facility test call feature to verify that each trunk is functioning properly. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside the local network) call. Issue 1 January 2008 83 . see Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers. 2.Chapter 6: After installation After initial configuration. Testing telephones 1. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network. and remove the installation equipment. Test local data connectivity on-site by checking that you can send an email between two PCs that are connected to the G450. Step 1: Testing the installation When the installation is complete. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up the receiver. Make outgoing calls from the telephone. Testing data connectivity Test data connectivity by pinging the IP address of each device to test the device’s connectivity within the network and outside the network. For information about how to use the facility test call feature. simple tests must be performed to test telephone and data connectivity. it is necessary to test the installation. 03-300432.

Refer to Table 5 for the IP addresses and controller information. b. 555-233-506). Verify that valid translations are file synchronized to the LSP by logging into Avaya Communication Manager from the LSP and listing either stations or trunks (refer to Administrator’s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. Verify that the list of stations or trunks is valid. If you are using Avaya IW to configure the G450. enter all the required IP addresses for the primary controller type.After installation LSP failover testing If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450 and configured as an LSP. Verify that the list of stations or trunks is valid. b. Verify that calls can be made between local telephones and to outside telephones. In the Usage options screen. the following are key actions that must be done in the wizard to ensure correct IP address configuration: a. There may be a delay after running AIW until the LSP is registered with the primary MGC and the translations are file synchronized. 84 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . and calls for the required primary controller IP addresses for your primary controller type. you need to perform a test to make sure that the LSP takes over control of the G450 if the G450 becomes disconnected from the primary MGC. 1. verify that you have correctly configured the required IP address(es) for the primary controller (MGC). ensuring that all telephones are still connected to the G450. do the following: a. Disconnect the G450 from the primary controller. If valid translations are not file synchronized to the LSP. Log in again to Avaya Communication Manager from the LSP and list either stations or trunks. 2. c. verify that the LSP node-name and IP address are correctly entered. 4. From a SAT session run from the primary controller. 3. select Install this media server as an LSP. If the files are not synchronized. The Primary Controller IP Address screen appears later in the wizard. In the Primary Controller IP address screen. d. Use the save translation lsp command to start the file synchronization process.

the software upgrade CDs. Note: If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450. and the modem (for installations without an S8300 module only). Note: Issue 1 January 2008 85 . leave the modem connected to enable reporting of alarms to remote locations.Step 2: Removing the installation equipment Table 5: IP addresses and controllers Primary media gateway controller S8300 S8400 IP addresses to configure The IP address of the primary S8300 The IP address of the S8400’s C-LAN or the IP address of an Ethernet port on the S8400 configured for processor Ethernet connections The IP address of the S8500’s C-LAN or the IP address of an Ethernet port on the S8500 configured for processor Ethernet connections The IP address of the S8710’s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8710 The IP address of the S8720’s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8720 The IP address of the S8730’s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8730 S8500 S8710 S8720 S8730 Step 2: Removing the installation equipment Remove all equipment that you used to assist you in the installation process. This may include the CD-ROM drive. the laptop computer.

After installation 86 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

consult your project manager for topology requirements for specific ports to be connected to specific devices. See Administrator’s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. This means you can add or remove a voice module in the Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running. However. Because hot insertion or removal resets the G450. Configuration is only necessary when you add telephones. Media Gateways and Servers. for an MM710 or MM722. Configuration of the G450 is not necessary when you add or remove a voice module. See Adding a telephone on page 89 and Adding a trunk on page 90. hot insertion and removal is not recommended in most cases. see Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Adding voice modules You can hot-swap voice modules. but the G450 resets when you add or remove the module. For information about setting the synchronization source of the G450. and trunks to the new module. 03-300431. it is usually advisable to set the media module as the synchronization source of the G450. This means you can add or remove a WAN module in the Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running. Issue 1 January 2008 87 . MM720. Adding WAN modules You can hot-swap WAN modules. Also. fax machines.Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices When adding new devices to the G450. any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration will be lost. or MM722 media module. without any disruption to your network. 555-233-506. Adding a media module Various media modules including voice modules or WAN modules can be added to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. Some configuration of the Avaya Communication Manager is necessary when you install an MM710.

ping the IP address of the device to test the device’s connectivity within the network and outside the network. For information about configuration. refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Adding a LAN device You must connect. Recording LAN information for software configuration Before software configuration for the new LAN device takes place. See Adding a WAN line on page 91. 88 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . If the LAN device is connected to an IP telephone. and the slot and port number on the G450 to which the telephone connects. Configuration is only necessary when you add WAN lines to the new module. refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. configure and test the LAN device before adding the device to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port. Configuring the LAN device on the G450 Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450. note the extension of the telephone to which the LAN device connects. gather the following information: ● ● The name and location of the owner of or person responsible for the LAN device The slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the LAN device connects. For instructions on connecting a new LAN device. Testing the LAN device After installation and configuration of the LAN device is complete. refer to Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81.Adding media modules and devices There is no configuration necessary when you add or remove a WAN module. see Connecting a switch or a network data port on page 47. For information about preparing a modem. or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300.

Make outgoing calls from the telephone. For information about preparing a modem. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network. see Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81. note the following information for software configuration: ● ● ● ● Name and location of the owner of the telephone Model number of the telephone Extension of the telephone Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone connects Testing the telephone 1.Adding a telephone Adding a telephone You must connect. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside of the local network) call. refer to of the following sections: ● ● ● Connecting an IP telephone on page 48 Connecting an analog telephone on page 50 Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module on page 52 Configuring the telephone on the G450 Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450. 2. Issue 1 January 2008 89 . refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. Connecting the telephone To connect a new telephone. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port. configure and test the telephone before adding the telephone to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. For information about configuration. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up the receiver. or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300. Recording telephone information for software configuration When you add a new telephone.

it is recommended to use a ground start trunk to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller disconnects For access to voice mail systems in the United States. connect. there are several recommendations depending on your system’s particular needs: ● For optimal functioning of the Emergency Transfer Relay feature. configure. Ground start trunks may be provided via the MM711 media module. Ordering the trunk ● ● Make sure to install the trunk near the physical location of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Make sure that the telephone service provider installs the trunk and verifies that the trunk is working properly before you contact the technician that is performing or supervising the configuration Note the telephone number of the trunk ● Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk When you order an analog trunk. see one of the following sections: ● ● ● Connecting an analog trunk on page 53 Connecting an E1/T1 trunk on page 54 Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk on page 54 90 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Adding media modules and devices Adding a trunk You must order. it is recommended to use a ground start trunk to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller disconnects. Request conditioned lines to ensure satisfactory voice quality and trunking interactions ● ● ● Connecting the trunk To connect a new trunk. it is recommended to use a loop-start trunk For voice mail systems in the United States. and test the trunk before adding the trunk to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.

see Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81. Make outgoing calls from the trunk. Ordering the WAN line If you need to order the WAN line. Recording trunk information for software configuration When you add a new trunk. Ask the technician that is performing or supervising the configuration for instructions how to access the trunk. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside of the local network) call. note the following information for software configuration: ● ● Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the trunk connects Telephone number of the trunk Testing the trunk 1.Adding a WAN line Configuring the trunk on the G450 Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450. Make a call into the G450 trunk. Adding a WAN line You must order. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port. configure and test the WAN line before adding the line to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. make sure that the service provider installs the line near the physical location of the G450 and verifies that the line is working before you configure the WAN on the G450. connect. or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300. For information about configuration. For information about preparing a modem. 2. Issue 1 January 2008 91 . refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.

see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. It is also recommended that you ping the IP address of a device using the WAN line and perform a trace route test in order to test connectivity with the network and outside the network. Configuring the WAN line on the G450 Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450. follow the instructions in Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct on page 59. note the following information for software configuration: ● Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the WAN line connects Testing the WAN link After installation of the WAN line is complete. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port. Recording WAN information for software configuration When you add a new WAN line. test the link by verifying that the SIG LED for the port to which the link connects is lit. or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300.Adding media modules and devices Connecting the WAN line To connect a WAN line. refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. see Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81. For information about preparing a modem. 92 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . see Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) on page 57. Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct To install an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct. For information about configuration.

ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly.Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units You can add or remove VoIP modules. Any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration is lost. and all calls are disconnected. However. or a power supply unit. the fan tray. Unscrew the two captive screws. wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag. Note: Consult your project manager before adding or removing VoIP modules in the G450. To do so. or if misaligned and then forced into position. Grasp the latches and pull out the main board from its slot. Adding or removing G450 main board modules You can add or remove VoIP modules in the G450 main board. To remove the G450 main board: a. b. you must pull out the G450 main board. Place the main board carefully on a table. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold the module only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Issue 1 January 2008 93 . If possible. Open the latches on both sides of the main board. one at each side of the G450 main board front panel. Note: Removing and inserting the G450 main board 1. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. Refer to Equipment List on page 295 for ordering information. The G450 supports hot insertion and removal of the main board without power drop. c. all services are suspended while the G450 main board is out. d.

b. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly. 60. wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel and then tighten the latches. If possible. Therefore. 1. the following number of active channels can be supported: 20. 140. 40. 180. Note that 220 channels cannot be supported. 120. e. However. Push the main board in until the latches begin to close. Use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure everything is OK. An MP20 provides 20 channels. d. 100. or if misaligned and then forced into position.Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units 2. 80. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. There is no configuration necessary when you install an MP20 or MP80 module. Locate the MP20 or MP80 module slot (see Figure 38). or 240. 94 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . and an MP80 provides 80 channels. 160. c. To insert an MP20 or MP80 module: a. 200. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. Insert the G450 main board vertically into the slot. Figure 37: Removing and inserting the G450 main board Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80 The G450 main board has four slots for VoIP engines. the G450 supports a maximum of 240 active channels. To insert the G450 main board: a. Open the latches on both sides of the slot. Each slot can accommodate either an MP20 (Media Processor 20) module or an MP80 (Media Processor 80) module.

Adding or removing G450 main board modules

Figure 38: Location of MP20 and MP80 modules

Figure notes: 1. MP20 or MP80 module slot 2. MP20 or MP80 module slot 3. MP20 or MP80 module slot 4. MP20 or MP80 module slot

b. Position the MP20 or MP80 module at a 45 degree angle to the main board, and start inserting it into an MP20 or MP80 slot (see Figure 39).

Issue 1 January 2008

95

Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units

Figure 39: Adding or removing an MP20 or MP80 module

c. Push the module in all the way. Do not use too much force. d. Flatten the module so it is flush with the main board. The latches at both sides click shut. e. After powering up, use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure everything is OK. 2. To remove an MP20 or MP80 module: a. Open the latches on both sides of the module slot. The module lifts up. b. Pull out the module. Touch the module only at the edges.

Replacing the fan tray
The fan system is field replaceable. It is mounted on a fan tray that can be replaced as one unit. The G450 supports hot swap of the fan tray. There is no need to power down or reset the G450 when replacing a faulty fan tray unit. Prepare the new fan tray for insertion before removing the current the fan tray: take the new fan tray out of its package and place it nearby.

96 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Replacing a power supply unit

!
Important:

Important: Replace the fan tray within one minute, to avoid overheating the G450. If the G450 exceeds its allowed heat level, it shuts down.

Figure 40: Replacing the fan tray

1. To remove the fan tray: a. Unscrew the two captive screws on the front panel of the fan tray. b. Grasp the screws and pull the fan tray out of its slot. 2. To insert the fan tray: a. Insert the fan tray all the way into the slot. b. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel. The fans start operating immediately. c. Wait one minute and then use the show platform fans CLI command to make sure everything is OK.

Replacing a power supply unit
The G450 provides full redundant, load sharing power supply units (1 + 1). A single power supply unit provides sufficient power for any G450 configuration. If you choose to install two power supply units, they operate in a load sharing mode. The G450 supports hot swap of the power supply unit. Even if you have only one PSU unit installed, there is no need to power down or reset the G450 when replacing a faulty power unit. You can install the replacement PSU in the second PWR slot, and it will become the active PSU once you remove the faulty PSU.

Issue 1 January 2008

97

Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units

Figure 41: Replacing a power supply unit

1. To remove a power supply unit: a. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the mains socket. b. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the power connector, located on the front panel of the power supply unit, at the rear of the G450. c. Loosen the two captive screws, one on each side of the power supply unit. d. Grasp the two side handles and pull the power supply unit out of its slot. 2. To insert a power supply unit: a. Position the power supply unit before the opening and engage both sides of the unit in the interior guides. b. Slide the power supply unit slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the unit does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. c. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel. d. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the power supply unit. e. Plug the power cable into a mains socket. f. After powering up, use the show platform power CLI command to make sure everything is OK. The upper PSU is referred to as PSU #1 in the CLI, and the lower PSU is PSU #2.

98 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software
If your Avaya G450 Media Gateway includes an Avaya S8300 Server, it might be necessary to upgrade the Avaya Communication Manager software. Upgrading the software can be performed in one of the following ways:

Remote configuration via Telnet — upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this scenario, a modem is required at the local site. See Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway — upgrade the software at the site, using a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300 Media Gateway Remote configuration via network — upgrade the software remotely via a network connection

Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive
The upgrade software is usually installed from a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300. If the upgrade is performed locally, you might need to provide a laptop and a USB CD-ROM drive. If the upgrade is performed from a remote location, you must connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the S8300 and insert the upgrade CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. You also might need to connect a modem. This depends on the method used to perform the upgrade. For a software upgrade on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway with an S8300 Server, use a USB modem. The only supported USB modem is the Multitech MultiModem USB, MT5634ZBA-USB-V92.

Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway
Upgrade the software at the site, using a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300 Media Gateway. 1. Connect the modem to a working telephone line. Note the telephone number of the line to which you connect the modem, so that you can provide the number to the technician who is performing or supervising the configuration.

Issue 1 January 2008

99

Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software

2. Connect the USB modem to either of the two USB ports in the Avaya S8300 Server. Note: You may be required to enable the modem and port. For instructions on enabling the modem, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. 3. Connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the free USB port on the Avaya S8300 Server. Then, insert the CD-ROM provided by Avaya into the CD-ROM drive.

Note:

Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive
You can upgrade the Avaya Communication Manager software without a CD-ROM drive by downloading the upgrade software or installing it from a laptop computer.

Remote configuration

Remote configuration via Telnet — upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this scenario, a modem is required at the local site. See Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Remote configuration via network — upgrade the software remotely via a network connection

Performing the upgrade
You can upgrade the S8300 using Avaya IW or the Upgrade tool. To upgrade S8300 software using Avaya IW, see Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151. For information about upgrading S8300 firmware using the Upgrade tool, see Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209.

100 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to take a new release from Avaya's website and store it on your hard disk for subsequent downloading to the appropriate devices. you can download new firmware to multiple network devices simultaneously from a single management station. Note: The G450 firmware also includes the firmware for the MM340 and MM342 media modules. Issue 1 January 2008 101 . Note: Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update Manager You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to view your network inventory and the firmware vintages of devices on your network. 14-300168. see the Avaya Software Update Manager 3. You can reach the server locally or via remote access.6 User Guide. Based on this information. You can upgrade the firmware on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and media modules using various different tools. For information about using Avaya Software Update Manager. ensuring all devices are updated. so you can update the software on your devices from anywhere in the world. Avaya Software Update Manager is a server application hosted on the Avaya Network Management server. Avaya Software Update Manager can also check the software versions currently in use against the latest versions available from Avaya and recommend updates when a newer version is available. You may also copy files containing embedded software to the server. The server stores all the software retrieved from the Web and can download the software to appropriate devices. Avaya Software Update Manager is part of the Integrated Management Enterprise Package which is an entitlement for all Avaya Communication Manager non-introductory offers.Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware Software used to control the Avaya G450 Media Gateway itself and media modules installed on the G450 is called firmware. each suitable for specific types of installation.

The primary controller may be an S8300. Download GIW from the Avaya Support website (support. See Setting up a TFTP server on page 107.com/avayagiw) to the laptop computer. Note: You can only use GIW to upgrade firmware on a G450 that does not contain an S8300. Note: This upgrade must be done locally. or S8700-series server. See Upgrading. 4. you can also use the Upgrade Tool to upgrade the S8300 software on the LSP. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108. 03-300412. The GIW runs the CLI commands on the G450 so the G450 can obtain the files from the TFTP server. Run GIW to perform the upgrade. 3. Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) 1. Note: Note: 102 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Download the G450 firmware files to the TFTP server. 2. You can also refer to the guide for the primary controller for information about upgrading firmware from the primary controller. Migrating. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. For instructions on performing the upgrade. Set up a TFTP server on the G450 network. Prepare installation worksheets. and Converting Avaya Servers and Gateways. If the G450 includes an LSP. see Job Aid: Upgrade Tool and Worksheets. S8500. you can upgrade G450 firmware from the remotely located primary controller using the Upgrade Tool. 555-245-757. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 5.Upgrading the G450 firmware Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller For a G450 without an S8300 or for a G450 with an S8300 installed as an LSP.avaya. For information about using the Upgrade Tool. see Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209.

555-245-754. you can use Avaya IW to upgrade G450 firmware and Avaya CM software. 4. If the CD-ROM does not contain the latest versions. For more details. You can point your browser to the ip address of the S8300B if you are in the customer network or via the modem connection. Alternatively. 5. 3. see Job Aid: Avaya Installation Wizard. This procedure also copies the G450 firmware as an RPM (Red Hat Package Manager) file from the Communication Manager CD-ROM into the /tftproot directory on the S8300. insert the Communication Manager CD-ROM into a CD-ROM drive connected to a laptop. Access Avaya IW. See Accessing Avaya IW on page 151. 1. These files are on the Avaya Communication Manager CD-ROM. 555-245-754. 2. To upgrade the S8300 Server software and G450 firmware. you should download the latest versions from the Avaya Support website to the laptop. you can upload the individual files to the hard drive of the laptop. Connect the laptop to the services port of the S8300 Server. you should check the Avaya Support website for the latest firmware versions and match these against the versions in the directory. Run Avaya IW to perform the required upgrades: ● Note: See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 160 for instructions for upgrading Avaya CM software See Firmware configuration on page 177 for instructions for upgrading G450 firmware ● Issue 1 January 2008 103 .Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) For a G450 with an S8300B installed. Place the upgrade software and firmware files on a laptop. Therefore. For more details. Prepare installation worksheets. Note: The CD-ROM may not contain the latest firmware. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 6. Upgrade the S8300 Server using the Avaya Installation Wizard. You can run Avaya IW from a remote location if the software is loaded locally. see Job Aid: Avaya Installation Wizard.

Upgrading the G450 firmware Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP You can upgrade firmware via FTP/TFTP using the CLI. Download the firmware files to the FTP or TFTP server. 4. Note: If you use an FTP server. when opening an FTP connection to the S8300. For each of these commands. 5. the CLI prompts you for a username and password. ● Use the copy ftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from an FTP server Use the copy ftp module command. all anonymous FTP file transfers are restricted to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory. include the full path of the file and the IP address of the FTP or TFTP host as parameters. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. followed by the module number of the module you want to upgrade. Note: CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file to the G450. see Setting up a TFTP server on page 107. Permission for anonymous FTP users to create files in other directories is denied. 1. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108 or Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server on page 109. For information about setting up a TFTP server. You must use the specific path to the file on the FTP or TFTP server according to the home directory of the service (FTP or TFTP) that you are using. Set up an FTP or TFTP server on the LAN connected to the G450. Also. Prepare installation worksheets. Run CLI commands. Connect to the G450 via modem or via the CON port on the front panel. See CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP on page 104. to upgrade the firmware on a media module from an FTP server Use the copy ftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from an FTP server Use the copy ftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from an FTP server ● ● ● 104 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . For information about connecting and enabling a modem for remote access. see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. but the upgrade files must first be downloaded to an FTP or TFTP server on the LAN connected to the G450. You can perform the upgrade remotely via a modem connection. 2. the G450 prompts you for a username and password when you enter a command to transfer a file. When you enter the command. 3.

Issue 1 January 2008 105 . use only the file name.134.net 149. you must enter the names of the target software and firmware versions that you need to install in the software and firmware upgrade worksheet.net from an FTP server with the IP address 149.fdl 192. the procedure will fail. login. you must use the following command: copy tftp module mm712v51. in the command line.Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP ● Use the copy tftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp module command.10 3 Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP.1. Note: Note: The following example uploads a firmware version with the path and file name C:\g450.fdl 192. you also need to plan the TFTP server IP address. use the following command: copy tftp module \version\mm712v51.1.134. without the directory path.1.153 to Bank A of the G450: copy ftp SW_imageA C:\g450.10. followed by the module number of the module you want to upgrade.49. in the example above.1. and password. If you will need to set up a TFTP server.1. where the home directory is c:\home\ftp\ and the upgrade file is located in the directory c:\home\ftp\version.10 3 Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300. Otherwise.49. you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server.153 Preparing installation worksheets Before you perform the upgrade. For instance. to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from a TFTP server ● ● ● Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a TFTP server with the IP address 192.1.

Upgrading the G450 firmware Entering values in Server Values worksheet Enter software and firmware upgrade file names in the following table: Table 6: Software and firmware upgrade file names Items for Upgrading File for LSP and primary controller (not used with Gateway Installation Wizard or for individual files) G450 Processor G450 Device Manager MM710 E1/T1 Media Module MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM712 DCP Media Module MM714 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM716 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM717 24-port DCP Media Module MM720 BRI Media Module MM722 BRI Trunk Media Module New file name for target Enter the TFTP server information in the following table: Table 7: Global Settings for TFTP Server TFTP Server IP Address TFTP Server Directory 106 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

The TFTP Server window appears and displays the IP address of the PC in the upper border. Double-click one of the links listed with TFTP Server. iptel_avaya_tftp. Record the directory location of the file. By default. 3. On the hard drive of the local PC. which provides instructions on installing iptel_avaya_tftp.Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP Setting up a TFTP server To load individual firmware files on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway. you will log onto the G450 and use its TFTP capability to download the new firmware. Note: A Linux or Unix TFTP server should be used only if a Linux or Unix TFTP server already exists on the local network. 2. 8.pdf.avaya. select Setup. 7. create a directory into which you will load the G450 firmware. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 107 . Enable the TFTP server as follows: a. the installation program creates the directory C:\Program Files\Walusoft\TFTPSuite containing the application files.exe file to the PC. 5.exe to open the program. It is recommended that you call the directory C:\tftp. Scroll to the bottom of the page to find the TFTP Server Application file. 9. When the file has been installed.exe for Windows servers.com/support on the Internet. download the appropriate files to your laptop and give it to the customer for proper placement and execution. The server option window appears. After downloading the iptel_avaya_tftp. Later. Note: You may also wish to download and view or print the file iptel. go to the directory where the software was installed and double-click the file tftpserver32. 6. 4. Double-click the file and download it to the local PC that will serve as the TFTP server. a TFTP server must be set up on the LAN. double-click the file and follow instructions to install it. In this case. plus port 69. If you can use an S8300 Server to stage the firmware. For example: 4630 IP Telephone R 1. you must place the files on a PC connected to the customer’s LAN or on an S8300 Server in the customer’s network. Connect to the LAN using Microsoft Internet Explorer on the local PC and access http:// www.73 and TFTP Server. The TFTP Server is on the Communication Manager CD-ROM. Search for software downloads for 4600 series IP telephones. If not. From the System menu. see Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server on page 109. Note: Setting up a TFTP on the LAN 1.exe.

if necessary. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads. Select the Options tab. 2.bin g450_emweb_1_0_7. Select No Incoming (default). See Setting up a TFTP server on page 107. leave this field unselected. d. if you wish to copy files as a backup prior to performing a software upgrade. 4. Click OK. Note: If you are performing the upgrade using the G450’s Command Line Interface (CLI) or the Upgrade Tool. See Table 8 for sample firmware file names. 6. However. Table 8: Sample Software and Firmware File names Component G450 Processors G450 Processor G450 Device Manager g450_sw_21_11_0.com/support website.Upgrading the G450 firmware b. 5. Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server 1. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download. the GIW requires that the files be placed on a TFTP server. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. However. Select Save this file to disk. you can place the upgrade files on an FTP server. Access the www. f.avaya. c. before you copy the file to the TFTP server. 3. Save the file to directory on the TFTP server on the local LAN that was created for this purpose.bin 1 of 2 File name Example Note: Note: 108 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Select the Outbound tab. A File Download window appears. and enter 69 in the Use Port field (default). Select the Inbound tab. and enter the directory location of the TFTP server for the outbound file path. and enter the directory path of the TFTP server for the inbound file path. Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file. e.

Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP Table 8: Sample Software and Firmware File names (continued) Component Media Modules MM710 E1/T1 Media Module MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 6 or earlier) MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 7) MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 20 or later) MM712 DCP Media Module MM714 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM716 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM717 DCP Media Module MM720 BRI Media Module MM722 BRI Media Module mm710v3.fdl 2 of 2 File name Example Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server Instead of using a separately configured TFTP server on the LAN.fdl mm722v3. You must then copy the files to the /tftpboot directory of the S8300 Server. After copying the files to the /tftpboot directory. Otherwise.fdl Mm717v3. you must copy the individual firmware files to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory on the S8300 Server using the Download Files web page on the S8300 Server.fdl mm716v80. To do this. Note: You only have to do this if you have not upgraded the S8300 first or if you did upgrade it first and found that the gateway files on the communication manager CD were out of date. the files appear in the /tftpboot directory automatically. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 109 .fdl mm711h20v54.fdl mm711v16. you can use the GIW or the Upgrade Tool to install the files to the G450 or its media modules by specifying the S8300 Server’s IP address as the TFTP server containing the new firmware files.fdl mm712v14. when you upgrade the S8300.fdl mm711h7v21.fdl mm714v5. you can use the TFTP server capability of an S8300 Server to stage the firmware for upgrading the G450.fdl mm720v1.

At the Linux prompt. 2. 7. 110 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The firmware file has been moved to the /tftpboot directory. The Linux prompt reappears. 8. Avaya Site Administration. The current directory has changed to /tftpboot. type ls. type cd /tftpboot. or another tool to access the S8300 Server command line. for each firmware file you want to install. To move multiple firmware files (most firmware files have an . The Linux prompt reappears. Use Telnet.Upgrading the G450 firmware Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server 1. A list of files in the directory appears. At the Linux prompt. The current directory has changed to /var/home/ftp/pub. 4. and press <Enter>. 6. At the Linux prompt. type mv <firmware_filename> /tftpboot. 3. and press <Enter> to move the firmware file to the /tftpboot directory. Repeat step 4. if necessary. Log in as craft. type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press <Enter>. 5. Check the directory to make sure the firmware files you want to install are listed. At the Linux prompt. use the command mv *. If you copy the firmware using the cp command.fdl /tftpboot. The Linux prompt reappears. remove the files from the /var/home/ftp/pub directory after you have copied them.fdl suffix).

Run CLI commands to copy the firmware files from the USB mass storage device to the G450. 2. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105.Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device You can upgrade firmware via a USB mass storage device using the CLI. CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file from a USB mass storage device to the G450. and copy the firmware files to the USB mass storage device. 3. Remove the USB mass storage device from the PC. use the following command: copy usb module usb-device0 \temp\mm712v51. Download the firmware files to a PC. Prepare installation worksheets. See CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device on page 111. 4. 5. and insert it into a G450 USB port.fdl 3 Issue 1 January 2008 111 . to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from a USB mass storage device ● ● ● Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a USB mass storage device where the upgrade file is located in the directory \temp\. ● Use the copy usb EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb module command. 1. Insert a USB mass storage device into the PC’s USB port. You must use the specific path to the file on the USB mass storage device. The upgrade files must first be downloaded to a local PC. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC on page 112. followed by the slot number of the module you want to upgrade.

Access the www. Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download.Upgrading the G450 firmware Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC 1. 4. Select Save this file to disk. Note: 112 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . before you copy the file to the PC. A File Download window appears. See Table 8 for sample firmware file names. 5. 2. 3. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads.avaya. 6. Save the file to a directory on the local PC.com/support website. if necessary.

upgrade scripts. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 113 . and settings files to IP phones. The local TFTP server stores the files and supports requests to read files from the its outgoing directory for phone images and scripts. Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using the S8300.com/elmodocs2/white_papers/ TFTP_HTTP_Download_External_060504. You can use CLI procedures for downloading the files for IP phone upgrade from the G450 TFTP server.pdf Note: IP telephones supported by the local TFTP Server feature ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 4601 4602 4602SW 4606 4610SW 4612/24 4620 4620SW 4690 SIP phone: 4602 SIP IP telephones not supported by the local TFTP Server feature ● ● 4630 4630SW Note: If you have an S8300 installed in the G450.Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files The Avaya G450 Media Gateway supports Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) downloading of configuration files and firmware files for IP phones.avaya. For more details refer to http://support. TFTP can be used to download image files. you can alternatively upgrade IP phones using the CM web pages.

the allocation may only suffice for one complete IP phone image and not two. The scripts are global to all the supported IP phone images. Thus. 114 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Since the image files are stored in RAM. the Avaya Software Update Manager (4.Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files Note: Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using Avaya IW or GIW.264 MB at the expense of the Sniffer cache application. is a GUI application that greatly simplifies the IP phone upgrade process. you can download the image files once for the IP phones that use the same image. 14-300168. There are four banks that can store up to two phone images (booter and phone application files) at any given time. You can download and then upload setting script files in order to update their content. it is possible that in some cases. each phone can have a booter application and a phone application. There are two script banks. the scripts are used by the IP phones when they are reset. and are therefore stored in NVRAM. so there is no need to store them permanently. It is not recommended to change the upgrade script. supporting two IP phone images in RAM. The maximum RAM for both applications is 12 MB.5 MB. There are four image banks. You can upgrade up to two types of phones and then release the banks for use with another IP phone type. see Avaya Software Update Manager User Guide. Note: An alternative tool. as described in Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151 and Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. In addition. These files are stored in the script banks in NVRAM and are preserved in the event of a reset or power failure. You can increase the RAM allocation for TFTP server to up to 11. provided the combined file sizes do not exceed the RAM allocation for TFTP server. The image files are used only for upgrading the IP phone. The maximum size for a booter application or phone application file is 4. avoiding the need to know the file names of the necessary upgrade files for each IP phone type. By default. There are cases where the image files are the same for different IP phone types.0 or higher). the IP phones require the downloading of the settings file and the upgrade scripts. For further information. Note: Note: Administering the upgrade When using supported IP phones with the G450. However. a reset or power failure erases these files. Note: The IP address of the TFTP server is the PMI. the RAM allocation for TFTP server is 10 MB. In these cases.

Note: Note: Issue 1 January 2008 115 . When using SCP. Upon reset. 2. Note: Previous releases of TFTP server required the configuration of the DHCP server option 43/176 with the named value pair TFTPDIR=/phonedir/ in order to allow the IP phone to access the files in this directory.Download the upgrade files to a laptop and copy them to a USB mass storage device.Download the phone upgrade files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server. 03-602055. reset is required. Note: The G450 uses the SSH protocol to support the use of SCP for secure file transfer. . obtain the desired phone upgrade files (script files. and phone application image files. any phone image files stored in RAM are erased. but cannot be used for copying image files. see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. proceed to step 2. For more information about establishing an SCP session. From the Avaya Support website. You can then copy the upgrade files to the G450. 4. You can download these files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server. boot image files. and an SCP server must be configured on the management station. using either of the following methods: . phone application image files). Note: An SCP server can be used for copying the script files. 3. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy running-config startup-config command. which do not exceed 128 KB. Note: Upgrading the IP telephone IP phone upgrade files include script files. This configuration is still supported but is no longer required. Reset the G450 using the reset command. the G450 is the SCP client. Check the available memory size for the image files using the show application-memory command. 5.Administering the upgrade ! CAUTION: CAUTION: To activate a change in RAM allocation to the TFTP server. otherwise proceed to step 6. Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system size command. boot images files. 1. If the memory size needs to be changed. or you can download them to a laptop and copy them to a USB device. Note that SCP can be used to download script files but not image files.

use either the copy ftp phone-image command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type. . 4602SW and 4602D phones. Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete. 7. Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed.To copy from the USB device. Later. use one of the following commands: ● ● ● copy scp phone-script copy ftp phone-script copy tftp phone-script . since they are already stored in NVRAM. .Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files 6. 9. you can delete the files using the erase phone-image command. Copy the boot image files for up to two IP phone types. 116 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command.To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server. . 4620 phones are upgraded.To copy from the USB device. insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-script command.To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server. Note: TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples In the following example. . The script files are not copied for the second upgrade. use either the copy ftp phone-image command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type. Copy the script files for the IP phone family. 8. insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command.To copy from the remote FTP/SCP/TFTP server.To copy from the USB device. which use the same image files. are upgraded first. Copy the phone application image files for up to two IP phone types. .

... otherwise proceed to step 5.. Done! 4. If the memory size is smaller than the combined sizes of the image files for the phones.do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Resetting the device... Check the available memory size for the image files using the show application-memory command.49... 5.. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy running-config startup-config command... Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system size command. For example: G450-001(super)# ip tftp-server file-system-size 18128 To change ip tftp-server file system size. and reset the device G450-001(super) 3. boot image files..168. Reset the G450 using the reset command. 2. From the Avaya Support website. download the desired phone upgrade files (script files.TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones 1.10.. For example: G450-001(super)# reset This command will reset the device *** Reset the device *** . phone application image files) to a remote FTP server at IP address 192.... Issue 1 January 2008 117 .. copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration file. proceed to step 2. For example: G450-001(super)# copy running-config startup-config Beginning copy operation ....

Copy the script files for the 46xx IP phone family using the copy ftp phone-script command.bin 192. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\4602sbte1_8..168.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation .10 Confirmation . Please refrain from any other operation during this time..49. use 'show download phone-script-file status' command G450-001(super)# 7. This operation may take up to 20 seconds.49.. use 'show download phone-script-file status' command G450-001(super)# G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptB 46xxupgrade.txt 192..txt 192. Copy the boot image files for the Avaya 4602 IP telephone using the copy ftp phone-image command.168. For more information ..do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Username: root Password: Beginning download operation . Please refrain from any other operation during this time.168. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command 118 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation . For more information . This operation may take up to 20 seconds. This operation may take up to 20 seconds. For example: G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\4602dbte1_8.do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Username: root Password: Beginning download operation . For more information . Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information ..168. This operation may take up to 20 seconds.Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files 6.49. Please refrain from any other operation during this time.49. For example: G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptA 46xxupgrade.10 Confirmation ...bin 192.

Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed. Copy the phone application image files for the 4602 IP phone type DEF4602D using the copy ftp phone-image command.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation . Please refrain from any other operation during this time. Please refrain from any other operation during this time.49.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation . For more information . For example: G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\bbla20_1817.. Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored in NVRAM 1..168.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ..49. Copy the boot image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp phone-image command.168.bin 192.. This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command 9. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command Issue 1 January 2008 119 . For more information . This operation may take up to 20 seconds.TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples 8.bin 192.bin 192. For example: G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageC pub\4602dape_8.. For more information ..168. This operation may take up to 20 seconds. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageD pub\4602sape_8.

Sniffer and TFTP server application memory sizes restore to defaults” You tried to download configuration files after configuring the total memory allocations for applications and Sniffer to more than 12 Mb in the startup configuration and performing a reset. The scenarios can be repaired by readjusting the downloading or configuration settings.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation .Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files 2.168. Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions Problem “Free Application Memory is xxx MB. you can delete the files using the erase phone-image command.. For example: G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\def20r1_8_1.49. Action Re-adjust the allocation of memory between the Sniffer cache application and the TFTP server..bin 192. Copy the phone application image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp phone-image command. “Application Memory reached its limits. For more information . Cannot download file to Gateway Refer to the specific error message you receive. Use show application-memory for more details” Possible cause You tried to configure more memory than is available in the main bank. None. 1 of 2 120 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . This operation may take up to 20 seconds. The memory allocations are set to the default values. Failure scenarios and repair actions There are various configuration related problems which will cause the upgrade to fail. use 'show download phone-image-file status' command Note: Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete. Be sure the Sniffer allocation is not needed for trouble shooting. Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

“TFTP . Wrong operation parameters or other operation already in progress. "File already Exists in other Bank" You tried to download the same file to more than one bank. Upload from a different bank. File names for IP phone image files and script files are limited to 32 characters ● Issue 1 January 2008 121 . please try again” Upgrading considerations ● Configuration files. Check the file name and path. None. 2 of 2 "Not enough memory in NVRAM" The remote file is larger than the available NVRAM. while phone images are stored in RAM Note: Image files are cleared if you reset the gateway. Free space in the NVRAM using the erase phone-script command.General failure” “Can't start upload operation. Copying a file to a bank containing a file with the same file name causes the old file to be overwritten by the new one. Download a file to the bank. Therefore. Action Free more space in the RAM using the erase phone-script or erase phone-image command. such as upgrade script and setting files. Note: ● Phone image banks are stored in the same TFTP directory. File name or path incorrect You are trying to upload a file from an empty bank. are copied to the phone configuration banks in NVRAM.Upgrading considerations Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions (continued) Problem "Not enough memory in RAM" Possible cause The remote file is larger than the available RAM. You cannot load two files with the same file name to more than one bank. you cannot copy the same file name to more then one bank.

Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files 122 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

This is especially helpful for efficient restoring or replicating of a G450 media gateway. see chapter 5 in Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. 03-602055. you can backup and restore the G450 files one by one. Issue 1 January 2008 123 . For information about G450 backup and restore.Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450 You can backup and restore the G450 to/from a USB mass storage device using a single CLI command for backup and a single CLI command for restore. using TFTP/FTP/SCP servers. If the G450 is located remotely.

Backing up and restoring the G450 124 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Replace the telephone. and tighten the connection if necessary. Check whether the physical connection is loose. or the WAN line. the problem is with the original power supply. 3. a trunk. If the telephone still does not work. If the new telephone does not work. see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131. For information on the various modules and their LEDs. Identifying the problem when one phone stops working 1. the problem is with the telephone itself. Check the LEDs on the module to which the telephone connects. Connect the telephone to a different network port. you may have to perform an NVRAM initialization if you are unable to access the CLI. 2. One telephone stops working If one telephone in the network stops working. If the telephone works. It is necessary to identify the specific problem to figure out how it can be resolved. Make sure the LED for the port to which the telephone is connected is lit. go on to the next step. Issue 1 January 2008 125 . If the telephone still does not work. 4. Note the port and module and contact your project manager. There could also be a problem with the telephone’s connection to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. If the telephone works. in which the power budget is exceeded and low priority ports are disconnected. If it is not lit. but the other telephones and data devices continue to work normally. In addition. If the ALM LED is lit. Check the module on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone is connected. go on to the next step. or a power management event. the problem may be with the port or the module.Chapter 13: Troubleshooting You can have problems with phones. this is also an indication that there is a problem with the port or the module. the power. the problem is probably with the telephone itself. If the telephone still does not work. go on to the next step. Connect the telephone to a different power supply. 5. If the new telephone works. go on to the next step. the problem is with the original network port.

Troubleshooting Several telephones stop working If some telephones in the network stop working. If the G450 still does not work. check the LEDs on that module. see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131. Contact your project manager. Connect the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to a different AC power source. but others continue to work. If the G450 has power. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. See Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131. 2. If the trunk still does not work. If they do not. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. 3. go on to the next step. there may be a system-wide problem. the problem is probably with that switch or port. there may be a system-wide problem. 2. If they do. Identifying the problem when several phones stop working 1. If the ALM LED is lit. Check the AC power source with a voltmeter. see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131. the problem could be with a trunk or with one of the modules in the G450. tighten the connection. Contact your project manager. the problem is with the original power source. Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same module. Check the connection between the trunk and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. A trunk stops working 1. 126 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same switch or port. If the physical connection is loose. go on to the next step. No power on the G450 1. If it is lit. go on to the next step. 3. go on to the next step. For information on the various modules and their LEDs. there may be a problem with the module. If they do. If it is lit. If not. Contact your project manager. For information on the chassis.

! CAUTION: CAUTION: Hot insertion of a WAN module resets the G450. any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration will be lost. If the line still does not work. see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131.For all serial interfaces (E1/T1 and USB). use the show interfaces Serial command to verify that the interface and line protocol are both up.For E1/T1 interfaces. and that all error counters do not increase. tighten the connection. If the ALM LED is lit. Make sure the controller is up. . see Maintenance Alarms for Communication Manager 2. If the physical connection is loose.Check the CON LED on the module. . 2. . use the show interfaces Serial command to verify that all line signals are up. CLI is not accessible You can perform an NVRAM initialization using a jumper on the G450 main board.A WAN line stops working 2. go on to the next step. Check the connection between the WAN line and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. You can try the following: . Issue 1 January 2008 127 . 3. 03-300190 for testing procedures. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. for example if the G450 resets continuously. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the trunk connects.For USB interfaces only. A WAN line stops working 1. For information on the various modules and their LEDs. there may be a system-wide problem. Media Gateways and Servers.Swap the module with another one. use the show controllers command to view the status of the interface’s controller. the problem may be the configuration of the module or a lack of T1 signal. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the WAN line connects. If it is lit. .1. You should only use this procedure if you are unable to access the CLI. Therefore. The CON LED indicates if you have a signal. check with your provider that you are receiving a signal. If the CON LED is lit. If it is lit.

ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Do not touch any components on the printed circuit board except when installing or removing the bridge for the jumper pins. 2. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. 4.Troubleshooting VOLTAGE ALERT: VOLTAGE ALERT: Disconnect the G450 from the external power source before proceeding. Locate the NVRAM init jumper (jumper J5) on the front of the G450 main board. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: 1. Refer to Figure 42. Figure 42: G450 NVRAM INIT Jumper Location 3. Bridge jumper P5 (refer to Figure 42) using the bridge provided in the accessory kit. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. 128 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

6. the G450 will continue to initialize the NVRAM when it resets or is powered up.CLI is not accessible 5. 7. ! Important: Important: If you do not remove the bridge. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. Remove the bridge. 8. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. Let the G450 operate for about 5 minutes so that it will boot and erase the current configuration. Issue 1 January 2008 129 .

Troubleshooting 130 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

For information about the different media modules that can be housed in the media module slots.Appendix A: Front panel description You can use the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to: ● ● ● ● ● Connect devices Add media modules View LEDs Reset the device Reset and recover from the alternate bank The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules Figure 43: The G450 front panel ports and slots Media module slots The G450 has eight standard media module slots (V1 through V8). see Combination limitations on page 35 and Allocating slots on page 35. Issue 1 January 2008 131 .

1 and 2. Use the Console port to connect a console device or modem to the G450. USB 1.Front panel description System LEDs Table 10: System LEDs LED MDM ALM CPU PWR Name Modem Detected Alarm CPU Power Color Green Red Green Green Indication A modem is connected to the CONSOLE or USB port An alarm is present in the system OFF — A test is in progress ON — Normal operation OFF — No power BLINKING — Problem with power ON — Normal operation USB ports USB are standard USB ports.0 compatible. Services port (SERVICES) The Services port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the Services port to connect a laptop through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port to the G450 for configuration purposes. The USB ports support the connection of: ● ● USB flash drive The Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem Console port (CON) The Console port is a standard RJ-45 network port. 132 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

You can connect an external LAN to ETH LAN. Implement the Contact Closure feature Connect an Avaya Partner System Contact Closure Adjunct™ box to the CCA port. For more information on Emergency Transfer Relay. which ships with the Emergency Transfer Panel. The contact closures can control devices such as devices that automatically lock or unlock doors or voice recording units.The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR) The ETR port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Router ports (ETH WAN) Each ETH WAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. see Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones on page 60. For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel. such as a telephone. Switch ports (ETH LAN) Each ETH LAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. but uses an RJ-45 network jack. see Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct on page 59. Issue 1 January 2008 133 . The Contact Closure feature is a controllable relay providing dry contacts for various applications. Use the ETR port to connect to up to two 808A Emergency Transfer Panels. For more information on Contact Closure. Use ETH LAN to connect a data device to the switch through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. a user can unlock a door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad. Use ETH WAN to connect a data device to the internal router through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. This port is used to support the G450’s Contact Closure feature. Contact Closure port (CCA) The Contact Closure port (CCA) is wired as an RJ-14 port. The adjunct box provides two contact closures that can be operated in either a normally closed or normally open state. For example. The CCA port can be configured so that the connected devices can be controlled by an end device. These panels provide basic telephone services in the event of system failure. see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Installation Instructions. The G450 serves as a router for the WAN.

the G450 loads firmware from Bank B. For example. The S8300 runs Avaya Communication Manager (ACM) to provide call control services to the G450 and other Avaya gateway devices. The purpose of this feature is to provide software redundancy. 3. This default setting can be changed by the system administrator. Release the reset button. 2. The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server The S8300 Server is a Pentium-based processor that runs on a Linux operating system. when you turn on or reset the G450. Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup 1. you can reset the G450 to load the firmware from Bank A instead. The front panel of the S8300 includes: ● ● 10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port (SERVICES) Two USB ports for modem connections or the USB CD-ROM drive (USB 1 and USB 2) 134 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Front panel description Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons RST is the reset button. Press and hold the reset button. ASB is the Alternate Software Bank button. The Avaya G450 Media Gateway has two firmware banks: ● ● Bank A Bank B Each firmware bank contains a version of the G450 firmware. you can reset the G450 using the other version. Press and hold the ASB button. if the G450 is configured to load firmware from Bank B. If one of the versions becomes corrupted. This is particularly important when uploading new versions. By default. 4. These may be different versions. Release the ASB button.

They are located towards the right of the front panel.The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server Figure 44: The S8300 Server S8300 Server ports The S8300’s 10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port is labeled SERVICES. It is off when none of these IP endpoints are registered with the S8300. Do not attempt to remove the S8300 without instructions from a specially trained technician. S8300 Server port LEDs Table 11: S8300 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication An alarm is present Avaya Communication Manager is running. When an S8300B is installed as an LSP. and is located in the center of the front panel. the front panel of the S8300 has a LED labeled OK TO REMOVE. This LED is lit whenever a G450. and can be removed from the G450 chassis. which is connected to a button labeled SHUT DOWN. This LED indicates that the S8300 has been shut down. ACT Activity Yellow In addition. a G700. Issue 1 January 2008 135 . or an IP console is registered with the S8300. an IP telephone. The S8300’s two USB ports are labeled USB 1 and USB 2. the green light shows that the server is up and waiting to provide service.

136 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Front panel description The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module The MM340 media module provides one WAN access port for the connection of an E1 or T1 WAN line. MM340 LEDs Table 12: MM340 LEDs LED ALM TST ACT SIG Name Alarm Test Activity Signal Color Red Green Yellow Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot A port is being initialized or a loopback is present At least one PPP/Frame Relay session is active The physical connection is up. This port is located in the center of the front panel. Figure 45: The MM340 media module front panel MM340 ports The MM340’s E1/T1 WAN access port is marked E1/T1.

The front panel of the Avaya MM342 media module The front panel of the Avaya MM342 media module The MM342 media module provides one USP WAN access port and supports the following WAN interface types: ● ● V.21 Figure 46: The MM342 media module front panel MM342 ports The MM342 contains one WAN SCSI access port.35/ RS449 X. MM342 LEDs Table 13: MM342 LEDs LED ALM TST ACT CON Name Alarm Test Activity Connection Color Red Green Yellow Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot A port is being initialized or a loopback is present At least one PPP/Frame Relay session is active The physical connection is up Issue 1 January 2008 137 .

so an external CSU is not necessary.Front panel description The front panel of the Avaya MM710 media module The MM710 T1/E1 media module terminates a T1 or E1 trunk. MM710 ports The MM710 contains an E1/T1 port. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion 1 of 2 138 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Note: Figure 47: The MM710 media module front panel Note: Note: The six ports in the middle of the front panel are used for testing. MM710 LEDs Table 14: MM710 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server. Note: For drop and insert. an external CSU is required. The CSU is only used for the T1 circuit. The MM710 has a built-in Channel Service Unit (CSU).

The light flashes at a rate of 0. The MM711 front panel includes eight universal analog ports. 2 of 2 SIG Signal Green The front panel of the Avaya MM711 media module The MM711 media module provides analog line.8 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization source is configured to synchronize the G450 and the T1 source is lost. Issue 1 January 2008 139 . Figure 48: The MM711 media module front panel MM711 ports The MM711’s eight universal analog ports are labeled 1 through 8. The physical connection is up. and the MM710 is not configured as the synchronization source of the G450.The front panel of the Avaya MM711 media module Table 14: MM710 LEDs (continued) LED ACT Name Activity Color Yellow Indication An E1/T1 trunk device connected to the module is in use. trunk and telephone features and functionality. The light is always on if the trunk is an ISDN E1 or T1 PRI trunk. or for analog trunks. The light flashes at a rate of 2.2 seconds on and 2.8 seconds on and 0.2 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization source is configured to synchronize the G450 and the module is receiving a T1 source signal. These ports can be used for analog telephone or fax machines.

ACT Activity Yellow The front panel of the Avaya MM712 media module The MM712 DCP media module includes eight DCP telephone ports. This can include a telephone that is off the hook. Figure 49: The MM712 media module front panel MM712 ports The MM712’s eight DCP telephone ports are labeled 1 through 8. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use. 140 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The ports support two-wire DCP telephones.Front panel description MM711 LEDs Table 15: MM711 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server.

These ports can also be used for DID trunks. Issue 1 January 2008 141 . Note: Figure 50: The MM714 media module front panel MM714 ports The MM714’s four analog telephone ports are labeled 1 through 4. Instead. Note: The four analog trunk ports can not be used for analog DID trunks. the four analog line ports must be used. The MM714’s four analog trunk ports are labeled 5 through 8. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use.The front panel of the Avaya MM714 media module MM712 LEDs Table 16: MM712 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server. This can include a telephone that is off the hook. ACT Activity Yellow The front panel of the Avaya MM714 media module The MM714 analog media module includes four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk ports.

0 and higher.0 and higher.Front panel description MM714 LEDs Table 17: MM714 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server. ACT Activity Yellow The front panel of the Avaya MM716 media module The MM716 media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector supporting 24 analog line ports. Figure 51: The MM716 media module front panel 142 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . This can include a telephone that is off the hook. The MM716 is compatible with Avaya CM version 2. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use. These ports can be configured as DID trunks with either wink start or immediate start.0. and G450 firmware version 25.

which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks. as needed. Table 18: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout Station port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Cable pair White White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Black Black Black Black Black Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 1 of 2 Issue 1 January 2008 143 . modems.The front panel of the Avaya MM716 media module MM716 ports The MM716 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector. or fax machines) to these jacks. trunks. You can attach up to 24 devices (analog telephones.

as needed. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use. You can attach up to 24 two-wire DCP telephones to these jacks. 144 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . connect an amphenol cable to the port and to either a breakout box or a punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks.Front panel description Table 18: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued) Station port 21 22 23 24 OPEN Cable pair Violet Violet Violet Violet Violet Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 2 of 2 MM716 LEDs Table 19: MM716 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server. ACT Activity Yellow The front panel of the Avaya MM717 media module The MM717 high density DCP media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector supporting 24 Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) ports. To use the MM717 media module. The MM717 does not support four-wire DCP telephones. This can include a telephone that is off the hook.

which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks.The front panel of the Avaya MM717 media module Figure 52: The MM717 media module front panel MM717 ports The MM717 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector. as needed. Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout Station port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Cable pair White White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Black Black Black Black Black Yellow Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue 1 of 2 Issue 1 January 2008 145 .

or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use ACT Activity Yellow 146 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Front panel description Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued) Station port 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OPEN Cable pair Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Violet Violet Violet Violet Violet Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 2 of 2 MM717 LEDs Table 21: MM717 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server.

ACT Activity Yellow Issue 1 January 2008 147 . MM720 LEDs Table 22: MM720 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server. In CM 3. or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A trunk connected to the module is in use. These ports interface to the central office at the ISDN T reference point. Figure 53: The MM720 media module front panel MM720 ports The MM720’s eight ISDN BRI ports are labeled 1 through 8.0 or higher. the LED could alternatively indicate that a telephone connected to the module is in use.The front panel of the Avaya MM720 media module The front panel of the Avaya MM720 media module The MM720 ISDN BRI media module contains eight 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI ports.

Figure 54: The MM722 media module front panel MM722 ports The MM722 contains two ISDN BRI ports. In CM 3.0 or higher. MM722 LEDs Table 23: MM722 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server.Front panel description The front panel of the Avaya MM722 media module The MM722 ISDN BRI media module provides two 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) 2B+D access ports with RJ-45 jacks. ACT Activity Yellow 148 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A trunk connected to the module is in use. the LED could alternatively indicate that a telephone connected to the module is in use.

25 in (133. Table 24: G450 Media Gateway specifications Description Height Width Depth Weight of empty chassis Weight of chassis with basic configuration. fan tray.4 kg (16. and blank panels on the media module slots Ambient working temperature Operation altitude Front clearance Rear clearance Relative humidity BTU Max current Value 5. one DSP.Appendix B: Technical specifications This appendix provides technical specifications for the G450 and for compatible power cords. including main board. G450 Media Gateway specifications Table 24 provides detailed information on the physical dimensions and tolerances of the G450 Media Gateway.5 kg (21 pounds) 14 Kg (31 pounds) 0-40°C up to 10000 ft (3048 m) 12 in (30 cm) 18 in (45 cm) 10-90%.5 pounds) with blank plates .6 mm) 18 in (456 mm) 7.780 BTU/h 6A Issue 1 January 2008 149 . power supply unit. non-condensing 1.9.3 mm) 19 in (482.

16 AWG. One end is to be terminated to an IEC 60320. 250V. The other end is to be terminated to either a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug for nominal 125V applications or a NEMA 6-15P attachment plug for nominal 250V applications.Technical specifications Power cord specifications Following are specifications for power cords suitable for use with the G450. 250V and a configuration specific for the region/country in which it will be used. The attachment plug must bear the safety agency certifications mark(s) for the region/ country of installation. sheet C13 type connector rated 10A. sheet C13 type connector rated 10A. 1. type SJT. 3-conductor (3rd wire ground). rated 250V. 3-conductor (3rd wire ground).0 mm2 minimum conductor size. 250V and the other end to a 3-conductor grounding type attachment plug rated at a minimum of 10A. For North America: The cordset must be UL Listed/CSA Certified. 150 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The cord is to be terminated at one end to a VDE Certified/CE Marked IEC 60320. For Outside North America: The cord must be VDE Certified or Harmonized (HAR).

If you are a business partner.Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) The Avaya IW is a web-based installation wizard that is used with the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to perform initial configuration tasks and to upgrade software and firmware. 2. Click Continue. Launch Internet Explorer on the laptop and type the following URL to access the S8300 Server Home Page: http://192. Connect a laptop computer to the Services port of the S8300. you will be able to upload configuration parameters from the EPW to AIW as part of your AIW session.252 Disable DNS Clear the primary WINS and secondary WINS IP Addresses Disable the Proxy Server in the Internet Explorer 3. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 151 . Note: Make sure the customer can change this login. you can also repeat this procedure to add the dadmin login.5 NetMask: 255.6. The Avaya IW is designed for use with systems that contain an S8300 Server.11. 5.13.255. Ask a customer representative for a login name and password that the customer would like for the superuser login. Enter the appropriate login name and password. operating in either ICC or LSP mode. Make sure the laptop is configured as follows: ● ● ● ● ● IP Address: 192.13. 4. The welcome screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears. 6. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24). You can use Avaya IW to configure the Avaya G450 Media Gateway or to upgrade an installed S8300 with new Avaya Communication Manager (CM) software and/or G450 firmware. its password.11. using a crossover cable. The Logon screen for Integrated Management appears. or its permissions later. Accessing Avaya IW 1.255.

select password. 14. prof18 is the code for the customer superuser. Enter the password in the Enter password or key field and the Re-enter password or key field.Add Login: Privileged Administrator screen appears. 9. The system informs you the login is added successfully. Type a login name for the account in the Login name field. 10. 17. select Security > Administrator Accounts. Verify the following: ● ● susers appears in the Primary group field. Click Submit. 8. where login name is the name you entered in step 11. /var/home/login name appears in the Home directory field. Note: Do not lock the account or set the password to be disabled. prof18 appears in the Additional groups (profile) field. Select Privileged Administrator and click Submit. From the Integrated Management main menu. 15. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages. Skip the fields Lock this account and Date on which account is disabled-blank to ignore. 18. 11. Select Add Login. The Administrator Accounts screen appears. 12. select Launch Maintenance Web Interface. /bin/bash appears in the Linux shell field. 16. The Administrator Logins -. ● ● 13.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 7. For the Select type of authentication option. In the section Force password/key change on next login select no. Select the Launch Installation Wizard link from the home page. The Overview screen appears: Note: 152 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Issue 1 January 2008 153 . Access the Avaya IW. The first screen that appears is the Overview screen.Preliminary screens Figure 55: The Overview screen Preliminary screens 1.

The Avaya IW performs system auto-discovery and displays the results on the following screen: 154 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 56: The Overview screen 2. Click Continue.

Click Continue. If you import an EPW.Preliminary screens Figure 57: The Auto Discovery Results screen 3. This screen allows you to import system data from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). The Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears. Issue 1 January 2008 155 . For information about obtaining the EPW. see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24. some of the fields on the subsequent screens will be filled automatically.

This option configures the installed S8300 Server as the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC). 156 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The primary MGC is the MGC that the G450 searches for first to provide call processing services to the G450. In this case. ● ● Configuring and upgrading the server 1. the installed S8300 will provide backup call processing services to the G450 in case of connection failure to the primary MGC. Click Continue from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen. Install this media server as an LSP. Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media gateway firmware. This option configures the installed S8300 Server as a backup MGC (LSP) and to configure an external server as the primary MGC.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 58: The Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen MGC configuration and upgrade options ● Install this media server as a Main Server. The Usage Options screen appears. This option upgrades an installed server with new Avaya Communication Manager software and/or Media Gateway firmware.

If you are configuring a new MGC. as shown below. Specify which configuration processes you would like to initiate: ● ● ● Install this media server as a Main Server Install this media server as an LSP Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media gateway firmware 3. See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 160. Click Continue. the Avaya Communication Manager Software screen appears. If you are upgrading an existing MGC. Issue 1 January 2008 157 . the Confirm New Installation screen appears.MGC configuration and upgrade options Figure 59: The Usage Options screen 2.

see Chapter 1: Before you install on page 19. Click Continue.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 60: The Confirm New Installation screen 4. Figure 61: The Checklist screen 158 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The Checklist screen appears displaying a list of required and optional items you need to configure the G450. For details.

Reset the G450’s date and time if necessary. Click Continue. Figure 62: The NVRAM INIT screen 6. The NVRAM INIT screen appears.MGC configuration and upgrade options 5. Click Continue. The Date/Time screen appears. Figure 63: The Date/Time screen Issue 1 January 2008 159 . Restore all factory default settings if necessary by clicking NVRAM INIT and selecting OK in the confirmation box.

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)

7. Click Continue. The Product ID screen appears. If you are configuring a new G450, enter the product ID in the ID field and select Assign a new Product ID. Figure 64: The Product ID screen

Upgrading an existing MGC
1. Click Continue from the Product ID screen. The Avaya Communication Manager Software Upgrade screen appears. This screen enables you to upgrade the Communication Manager software on the S8300 installed in the G450.

160 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Upgrading an existing MGC

Figure 65: The Avaya Communication Manager Software Upgrade screen

2. If you want to enable/disable the SES Co-Res server, move on to step 4. If you want to upload a new release of Avaya Communication Manager software, click Upload New Release.

Issue 1 January 2008

161

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)

Figure 66: The Avaya Communication Manager Upload Source screen

3. Select the source from which the Avaya Communication Manager release will be uploaded. 4. Click Continue. The SES Co-Res screen appears. This screen allows you to enable or disable a SES Co-Res server.

162 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Upgrading an existing MGC

Figure 67: The SES Co-Res screen

5. Click Continue. The Software Update screen appears. This screen allows you to unpack Avaya Communication Manager updates.

Issue 1 January 2008

163

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)

Figure 68: The Software Update screen

6. If you want to unpack an Avaya Communication Manager update, check Unpack Update and browse to locate the update file on the laptop. 7. Click Continue. The Phone Message Files screen appears. Use this screen to install standard and custom phone message files that provide messages for display sets that are in the desired language format.

164 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Upgrading an existing MGC

Figure 69: The Phone Message Files screen

8. Click Continue. The Media Server - IP Addresses screen appears. If your S8300 Server is already configured, the Avaya IW should detect and display its address information in this screen. If not, you must enter the required information.

Issue 1 January 2008

165

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 70: The Media Server .IP Addresses screen Configuring the primary controller IP addresses 1. If you selected the Install this media server as an LSP option in the Usage Options screen. Click Continue from the Media Server .IP Addresses screen. 166 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Enter the required IP address(es) for the primary controller. the LSP Controller screen appears. The IP addresses required vary depending on the type of primary controller.

Configuring the primary controller IP addresses Figure 71: The LSP Controller screen 2. select the services you want. Figure 72: The Optional Services screen Issue 1 January 2008 167 . Click Continue. From the Optional Services screen.

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 3. Click Continue. Figure 73: The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen 4. Click Continue. the Domain Name Server (DNS) screen appears. If you selected Domain Name Service (DNS) in the Optional Services screen. 168 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . If you selected Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Optional Services screen. the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen appears. Enter the required information. Enter the required information.

the Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen appears. Figure 75: The Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen Issue 1 January 2008 169 . If you selected Network Time Protocol (NTP) in the Optional Services screen.Configuring the primary controller IP addresses Figure 74: The Domain Name Server (DNS) screen 5. Click Continue. Select an NTP option.

Click Continue. If you selected Remote Access/INADS Support in the Optional Services screen. station button assignment. including translations for administration of extension ranges. routes. 170 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . For instructions on how to obtain the INADS IP address. Click Continue. Enter a dialup IP address for Installation and Administration System (INADS) remote support. Figure 76: The INADS screen 7. trunk types. Use the screen to generate Avaya Communication Manager translation information. The Translation Source screen appears. class of service. the INADS screen appears. and several other parameters. see Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 6. trunk access codes. feature access codes.

The Security Files screen appears if there is a resident server on the gateway. For information on this file.Configuring the primary controller IP addresses Figure 77: The Translation Source screen 8. the Security Files screen displays also the installed status of the CM’s authentication file and enables you to install or replace the authentication file from the laptop or LAN source. Without a valid license file. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 171 . you cannot access the Avaya Communication Manager. This screen displays the installed status of the license file and enables you to install or replace the file from the laptop or LAN source. Click Continue. Note: If you selected Use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (Figure 77). see Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop on page 21.

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 78: The Security Files screen 172 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Figure 79: The IP Addresses screen 2. as well as the type of media module residing in each slot of the G450’s chassis.Opening telnet sessions from the G450 . The PMI configuration screen appears. Click Continue from the Security Files screen. Click the wrench icon corresponding to the G450 in the Action column. The IP address and subnet mask of the PMI should appear in this screen.Sending SNMP traps . Note: Issue 1 January 2008 173 .Gateway configuration Gateway configuration 1. This screen displays the G450’s ID. The IP Addresses screen appears.Registration of the G450 to an MGC . Change this IP address and subnet mask in accordance with your system specifications.Sending messages from the G450 using FTP and TFTP protocol Note: You can assign any IP interface that the MGC recognizes to be the PMI. The Primary Management Interface (PMI) address is the interface used for the following management functions: .

see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 80: PMI Configuration screen 3. 174 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . specify a name for the SNMP read community access name to assign to the G450. The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen appears. In the Read Only Community String field. Click Continue. 03-602055. specify a name for the SNMP write community access name to assign to the G450. Re-enter the strings in the Re-enter Community String fields for confirmation. In the Read Write Community String field. For information about SNMP.

Click Continue. Figure 82: The SNMP V3 screen Issue 1 January 2008 175 .Gateway configuration Figure 81: The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen 4. The SNMP V3 screen appears.

or an Avaya S8300 Server installed in an external media gateway. Otherwise. it searches for a backup MGC. configure the S8300 as a backup MGC. If you do not configure the S8300 installed in the G450 as the primary MGC. use the IP address of the server’s Control-LAN card (CLAN) rather than the IP address of the server itself. Specify your primary MGC in accordance with the usage option you chose (see step 1). Note: Note: Figure 83: The Media Gateway Controller Information screen 176 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Note: To register an S8500 or S8700-series Server as the MGC. Configure the list of Media Gateway Controllers (MGCs) that will provide call processing services for the G450. An MGC may be the Avaya S8300 Server installed in the G450 or an external Avaya S8500 Server or Avaya S8700-series Server. 6. If it cannot connect to the primary MGC. You can specify up to three backup MGCs in the optional IP address boxes. Click Continue. leave all fields blank.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 5. Complete all fields if you want to configure an SNMP V3 user. in priority order. You must specify a primary MGC in the first IP address box. Note: The G450 searches for the primary MGC first. The Media Gateway Controller Information screen appears.

select the modules you want to upgrade and click Continue To upload a new firmware version from a laptop. ● ● To upgrade firmware. click Upload New Firmware. as well as the most recent available versions.Firmware configuration Firmware configuration 1. Issue 1 January 2008 177 . or use the Browse button to locate the file. click Continue from the Media Gateway Controller Information screen. This screen displays the currently installed firmware versions on the G450 and its media modules. The Firmware screen appears. The Firmware File Upload screen appears. To proceed without upgrading any firmware. Enter the file path of the file you want to upload. The Firmware File Upload screen allows you to upload a new firmware file from a laptop. clear all the boxes in the Select column and click Continue ● Figure 84: The Firmware screen 2. To upgrade the G450 firmware.

Optional screen appears. 4. Click Continue. The master key is used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 85: The Firmware File Upload screen 3. etc. 178 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Click Continue. Clear all the checkboxes in the Select column. The file is uploaded and the Firmware screen returns. The Change Master Key .) in the gateway configuration file.

If you want to change the master key. Click Continue. 6. enter the new master key passphrase and then confirm by entering it again. A new master key is generated from the passphrase. The Gateway License screen appears.Optional screen 5.Firmware configuration Figure 86: The Change Master Key . Issue 1 January 2008 179 .

Click Continue. The Gateway Authentication screen appears. 8. If you will need to use the VPN feature on the G450. see Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop on page 21. check Install Gateway License file and fill in the remaining fields to install the gateway license file. For information on the Gateway license file. 180 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 87: The Gateway License screen 7.

The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. Click Continue.Firmware configuration Figure 88: The Gateway Authentication screen 9. If you have a service contract. the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. This authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote access to the gateway. Issue 1 January 2008 181 . View the status of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.

Click Continue.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 89: The FRU Status screen 10. Figure 90: The TFTP Server screen 182 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The TFTP Server screen appears.

Modem configuration 1. 12. In the Server IP Address field. If you selected FTP or SCP. Therefore. If you selected SCP as your upload protocol. check any files you wish to upload. which do not exceed 128 KB. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears. Select the modem type you want to use. For more information on using a modem with the G450. click Continue on the TFTP Server screen.Firmware configuration 11. see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. To configure the G450 for modem use. the checkboxes for the phone images are disabled. or SCP) you want to use to upload the files from the host machine. d. an SCP server can be used for copying the script files. TFTP is selected by default. The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP. FTP. b. If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP Server. enter the username and password in the Username and Password fields. Issue 1 January 2008 183 . If a green circled checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded column. In the Select column. the file has already been uploaded. c. but cannot be used for copying image files. and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter Password field. enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files that are to be uploaded. do the following: a.

enter the required information in the G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen. then click Continue. If you selected USB Modem. 184 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . the G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen appears.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 91: The G450 Modem Type Selection screen 2. See Telephony configuration on page 186. 3. the Country screen appears. Click Continue. If you selected Serial Modem. If you selected Serial Modem. If you selected None. the G450 USB Modem Configuration screen appears.

Firmware configuration Figure 92: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen 4. If you selected USB Modem. then click Continue. Issue 1 January 2008 185 . enter the required information in the G450 USB Modem Configuration screen.

1. The Country screen appears. Trunking. and Endpoints sections appear in the wizard. Select the country in which the installation is taking place. click Continue in the applicable modem configuration screen. 186 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . the Telephony.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 93: The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen Telephony configuration If you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen. To configure the G450’s telephony parameters. skip to Alarm configuration on page 198.

Click Continue.Firmware configuration Figure 94: The Country screen 2. Figure 95: The Import Custom Template screen Issue 1 January 2008 187 . This screen allows you to configure telephony translation defaults for the Avaya IW. The Import Custom Template screen appears.

Click Continue. Figure 96: The Call Routing screen 188 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 3. The Call Routing screen appears. Enter the required call routing information.

Firmware configuration 4. select Private Networking. To add additional extension ranges. If you want this range to be used to route calls over an IP trunk. When you are finished. Figure 97: The Extension Ranges screen Issue 1 January 2008 189 . Click Continue. To add a range. repeat these steps. click Continue. click Add Extension Range and enter the starting and ending extensions for the range. The Extension Ranges screen appears.

Click Continue. 190 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Enter the file path of the file you want to import. If your trunk cross-connects have not been completed. extension numbers. If your trunk cross-connects have been completed. click Continue to proceed with trunk configuration. This screen allows you to import an Excel file that contains user names. Click Continue. To configure the G450’s trunk parameters. Select Import the following name and number list. click Continue from the Import Name/Number List screen. The Import Name/Number List screen appears. Figure 98: The Import Name/Number List screen Trunk configuration The Trunking section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). To import this file: a. The Cross-Connects screen appears. b. or use the Browse button to locate the file. and other information. skip to Alarm configuration on page 198.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 5. 1. it is strongly recommended to exit the Avaya IW and complete all cross-connects before proceeding with trunk configuration. If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen. c.

Figure 100: The IP Trunk List screen Issue 1 January 2008 191 . This screen displays all IP trunks configured on the G450. The IP Trunk List screen appears. Click Continue.Firmware configuration Figure 99: The Cross-Connects screen 2. click Refresh. To refresh this list.

and removing a trunk. modifying trunk parameters. To add a new trunk click Add IP Trunk from the IP Trunk List screen. Enter the required information in the IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen and click Continue. click Continue or select an action from the Actions column to modify an existing trunk. The IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen appears. Adding a trunk 1. modifying IP route configuration. Figure 101: The IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen 2. 192 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . When you are finished adding trunks. click Add IP Trunk and repeat this step. The IP Trunk List appears. From the IP Trunk List screen you can perform actions including: adding a trunk. click Continue. To proceed to the CO Trunk List screen for configuring a trunk media module. displaying trunk status. with the new trunk included in the list of trunks. To add an additional trunk.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 3.

To modify the trunk’s parameters. Figure 102: The configuration icon in the Actions column The IP Trunk Configuration (<trunk name>) screen appears.Firmware configuration Modifying trunk parameters 1. with the trunk’s current parameters displayed. or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. The IP Trunk List appears. Figure 103: The IP Trunk Configuration screen (with current parameters) 2. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197. click the configuration icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. Modify the trunk parameters and click Continue. Select an additional action from the Actions column. Issue 1 January 2008 193 .

and click Continue. To modify the trunk’s IP route configuration. Select an additional action from the Actions column. 194 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The IP Route Configuration screen displays the extension ranges available for private-network routing. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197. or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. The IP Trunk List appears. click the IP route icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. if any.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Modifying IP route configuration 1. Figure 105: The IP Route Configuration screen (with extension ranges) 2. Modify these ranges. Figure 104: The IP route icon in the Actions column The IP Route Configuration screen appears.

Issue 1 January 2008 195 . click Continue.Firmware configuration Displaying trunk status 1. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197. click the trunk status icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. The IP Trunk Status screen displays the operational status of the trunk. Figure 106: The trunk status icon in the Actions column The IP Trunk Status screen appears. Select an additional action from the Actions column. The IP Trunk List appears. or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. To refresh the information. Otherwise. Figure 107: The IP Trunk Status screen (with the operational status) 2. To display the trunk’s operational status. click Refresh.

click the trunk’s remove icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. 196 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Figure 109: Message to remove trunk 2. Click OK to remove the trunk.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Removing a trunk 1. To remove a trunk. Select an additional action from the Actions column. Figure 108: The remove trunk icon in the Action column A message appears asking if you want to remove the trunk.

To configure a trunk media module. The CO Trunk List screen appears. click Continue from the IP Trunk List screen. For instructions on endpoint installation. You can access endpoint installation information from this screen. Use this screen which lists trunk media modules detected in the G450 to configure a media module and run diagnostics. click Continue from the CO Trunk List screen. or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. click the Actions icon for the module.Firmware configuration Configuring a trunk media module 1. The Endpoint Installation screen appears. If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen. Figure 110: The CO Trunk List screen 2. skip to Alarm configuration on page 198. To configure or run diagnostics on a trunk media module. Endpoint installation The Endpoint section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). Issue 1 January 2008 197 . Select an additional action from the Actions column.

click Continue from the Endpoint Installation screen if you selected the option to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen. Perform the following actions from this screen: ● ● ● Click Reset to reset the modem Click Refresh to re-detect and test the modem Select the appropriate modem access policy in the Modem Access area and click Continue 198 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Figure 111: The Endpoint Installation screen Alarm configuration 1. The Modem Status & Configuration screen appears. To display modem status and configure alarms. or the USB modem screen otherwise.

Firmware configuration Figure 112: The Modem Status & Configuration screen Issue 1 January 2008 199 .

see Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. Enter the required information from the ART tool.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 2. Click Continue. Figure 113: The OSS Configuration screen 200 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The OSS Configuration screen appears. For information on using the ART tool.

Figure 114: The SNMP Configuration screen Issue 1 January 2008 201 . Check the Enable checkbox to enable each trap destination. Click Continue. For each destination. You can add multiple destinations. In the Community Name field.Firmware configuration 3. Click Add Trap Destination to add an SNMP trap destination IP address. The SNMP Configuration screen appears. enter the INADS IP address in the Destination IP Address field. Check Enable SNMP Alarming if you want to enable the sending of SNMP traps to the INADS. Check the Alarm Abbreviation checkbox if you want to enable SNMP alarm abbreviation. enter an SNMP community access string.

Without a valid authentication file. If the screen displays Not Installed. Check Install New Authentication file. Enter the full path of the authentication file in the File Path field. The Authentication File screen displays the installed status of the authentication file and enables you to install or replace the file from the laptop or LAN source.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) Password and final screens 1. b. The Authentication File screen appears if there is a resident server on the gateway and if you selected Translations will be added after the installation has been completed using the SAT. ASA or another Integrated Management tool in the Translation Source screen (Figure 77). To change your password (optional) and complete the installation. This screen allows you to change the root password on the G450. 202 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . click Continue from the SNMP Configuration screen. you must install the file now. Figure 115: The Change Root Password screen 2. Click Continue. you cannot access the Avaya Communication Manager. The Change Root Password screen appears. ProVision. To install a new authentication file: a.

Firmware configuration Figure 116: The Authentication File screen Issue 1 January 2008 203 .

To save the installation log file: a. Click Continue. A dialog box appears. Click Save. 204 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Press <F5> to restore the Back and Continue buttons to the Finish Up screen. c. Click Save Log File. The Finish Up screen appears.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 3. Click Continue. This screen allows you to save the installation log file to your laptop. If you have not installed an allocation license file. ! WARNING: WARNING: Do not click Open. Figure 117: The Finish Up Screen 4. Clicking Open will damage the log file and may cause other problems to the Avaya IW. b. a warning appears reminding you to install this file.

Click Continue.Firmware configuration 5. The following figure shows a portion of the Verify Gateway Installation screen. Figure 118: Verify Gateway Installation screen Issue 1 January 2008 205 . This screen displays a list of CLI commands that you can use to verify the G450 configuration. The Verify Gateway Installation screen appears.

Click Continue. This screen allows you to launch the Gateway Device Manager. Figure 119: The Launch Device Manager screen 206 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . an application that allows you to configure the WAN Router and perform other advanced configuration tasks. The Launch Device Manager screen appears.Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 6.

Click Continue. Figure 120: The Congratulations! screen The Exit AIW screen appears. The Congratulations! screen appears to inform you that the installation is complete.Firmware configuration 7. click Finish. Figure 121: The Exit AIW screen Issue 1 January 2008 207 . To exit the Avaya IW.

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) 208 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

For information about downloading firmware upgrades from the Web to the TFTP server. This appendix describes how to run GIW. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades. and how to connect and test a modem if you choose to enable the modem.Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) If you did not install an S8300 in the G450. Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Running the GIW performs a basic configuration of the G450. GIW includes the option to enable a modem connected to the S8300. you will be able to upload configuration parameters from the EPW to GIW as part of your GIW session. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web. Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP. Note: Note: Issue 1 January 2008 209 . Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24). The configuration can include: ● ● ● ● Configuring the Primary Management Interface (PMI) Setting SNMP communities and trap destinations Upgrading firmware Enabling a modem on the G450 Performing a basic configuration of the G450 1. you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server. see Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108. you can use the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) to perform the configurations required to complete the installation. GIW prompts you for all the configurations required to complete the installation.

210 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) 2. double-click the GIW icon to run GIW.com/avayaiw) to the laptop computer. Figure 122: COM Port Selection screen 8. The Overview screen appears. 4. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website (support. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 7. Select the COM port on the laptop that you are using to connect to the G450. 3. From your laptop computer. The G450 Wizard Usage Options screen appears. Click Continue.avaya. 9. The COM Port Selection screen appears. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. 6. 5. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. Click Continue.

Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 123: G450 Wizard Usage Options screen 10. 11. Click Continue. The Initializing the Components screen appears. Select Continue the installation using this wizard. Issue 1 January 2008 211 .

Check Initialize the Gateway Installation Session. The Import Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 124: Initializing the Components screen 12. 212 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Click Continue. 13.

16.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 125: The Import Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen 14. The IP Addresses screen appears. check Import EPW. If you have an EPW on your laptop (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24). Any values that are included in the EPW will appear as default values from now on as you move through this wizard. 15. Browse to the EPW file on your laptop. If you are using GIW to only upgrade files. Click Continue. verify that Import EPW is unchecked. Issue 1 January 2008 213 .

Click in the Action column. 18. The PMI screen appears. 214 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . continue with step 30. 17.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 126: The IP Addresses screen The IP Addresses screen displays information about the G450 automatically detected. If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware. such as what media modules are installed in the media modules slots.

Click Continue.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 127: The PMI screen 19. Issue 1 January 2008 215 . If you do not know which interface to designate as the PMI. In the PMI screen. The PMI is used as the IP address of the G450 for specific management functions. The SNMP V1 screen appears. check with your project manager. specify the details of the Primary Management Interface (PMI) for the G450. 20.

216 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The SNMP V3 screen appears. In the SNMP V1 screen. Click Continue.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 128: The SNMP V1 screen 21. specify SNMP V1 community strings for Read Only and Read Write access. 22.

select the authentication protocol by which the SNMP V3 user should be authenticated (SHA1 or MD5). In the Privacy Password field. e. enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters specifying the user’s authentication password.Media Gateway Controller List screen appears. enter the authentication password again for verification. d. The authentication password is transformed using the authentication protocol and the SNMP engine ID to create an authentication key. c. The IP Addresses . In the Re-enter Privacy Password field. If you want to configure an SNMP V3 user on the G450: a. In the Authentication Password field. In the Authentication Protocol field. In the User Name field. enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters specifying the SNMP V3 user’s privacy password. enter the privacy password again for verification. 24.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 129: The SNMP V3 screen 23. In the Re-enter Authentication Password field. enter a string of up to 32 characters representing the SNMP V3 user. Issue 1 January 2008 217 . f. b. Click Continue.

Click Continue. in the subsequent boxes. Click Ping Test to test the accessibility of each MGC. Specify Transition Point information. The Firmware screen appears. Specify the IP addresses of up to three additional MGCs.Media Gateway Controller List screen 25. Click Continue. In the Media Gateway Controller List screen. 218 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . 26. specify the IP address of the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC) in the first IP address box.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 130: The IP Addresses . 30. 28. optionally. You return to the IP addresses screen. 27. 29.

36. enter the address of your TFTP server.Optional screen appears. 34.) in the gateway configuration file. check the Select box for all firmware components you want to upgrade. Issue 1 January 2008 219 .Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 131: The Firmware screen 31. 35. The firmware is upgraded and the Change Master Key . etc. 32. In the table. In the TFTP Directory field. Click Continue. In the TFTP Address field. Enter the file name of each firmware upgrade file you want to install in each line of the table where you checked the Select box. enter the name of the directory on the TFTP server in which the upgrade files are located. The current version of each component is listed to help you confirm the need for upgrade. 33. Upload any firmware upgrades you need to install to your TFTP server. The master key is used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords.

If you want to change the master key.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 132: The Change Master Key . 38. A new master key is generated from the passphrase. 220 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Click Continue. The Gateway License screen appears. enter the new master key passphrase and then confirm by entering it again.Optional screen 37.

For information on the Gateway license file. Click Continue. Issue 1 January 2008 221 . see Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop on page 21. The Gateway Authentication screen appears.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 133: The Gateway License screen 39. 40. check Install Gateway License File and fill in the remaining fields to install the gateway license file. If you will need to use the VPN feature on the G450.

This authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote access to the gateway. 222 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. If you have a service contract.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 134: The Gateway Authentication screen 41. Click Continue. View the status of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.

Click Continue. The TFTP Server screen enables you to upload firmware and configuration files for IP phone upgrades to the G450 TFTP server. Issue 1 January 2008 223 .Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 135: The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen 42. The TFTP Server screen appears.

do the following: a. If you selected FTP or SCP. 44. The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. but cannot be used for copying image files. enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files that are to be uploaded. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP. c. TFTP is selected by default. and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter Password field.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 136: The TFTP Server screen . an SCP server can be used for copying the script files. b. Therefore. or SCP) you want to use to upload the files from the host machine. Click Continue. enter the username and password in the Username and Password fields. 224 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP Server. In the Server IP Address field.part 1 43. which do not exceed 128 KB. FTP.

Note: Issue 1 January 2008 225 . If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware. check any files you wish to upload. In the Select column. 46.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 137: The TFTP Server screen . Go to step 55. click Continue until you reach the Finish Up screen. If a green circled checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded column. the checkboxes for the phone images are disabled. the file has already been uploaded. The files are uploaded and the G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears.part 2 45. Note: If you selected SCP as your upload protocol. Click Continue.

226 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . select the type of modem you want to connect. The appropriate modem configuration screen appears. 48. 49. select None. Click Continue. If you do not need to connect a modem to the G450. If you do need to connect a modem to the G450.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 138: The G450 Modem Type Selection screen 47.

Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 139: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen Issue 1 January 2008 227 .

. Select the authentication method: ● If you have an Avaya Service contract. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. In the PPP IP Address field. 52. . 228 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. ● 53. re-enter the CHAP secret key. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask. 51. check Enable ASG Authentication to enable remote access to the device.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 140: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen 50.Check Enable CHAP Authentication. The Change Root Password screen appears. Click Continue.In the Confirm CHAP Secret field. enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool.In the CHAP Secret field. enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool. If you do not have an Avaya Service contract: .

enter the current password in the Current Password field. 55. enter a new password in the New Password field. Click Continue. Issue 1 January 2008 229 .Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 141: The Change Root Password screen 54. and re-enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field. If you would like to change the password on the G450 Media Gateway. The Finish Up screen appears.

230 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line. 2. Further configurations. you can now connect the modem. or locally. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer. can now be performed either remotely. if necessary If you enabled a serial or USB modem on the G450 during your GIW session. Connecting a serial modem 1. 4. 3. Connect a modem. Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem. via a modem that you enabled with GIW.Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Figure 142: The Finish Up screen Follow the on-screen instructions if you want to save the installation log file. as described in this screen. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem.

Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem. 3. 2. verify that the MDM LED is lit. the MDM LED on the G450 front panel lights.Test the modem connection Connecting a USB modem 1. Testing the modem If you connected a modem. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450. Note: Test the modem connection If the modem is successfully initialized. Issue 1 January 2008 231 . and then dial into the modem to check that you can authenticate to the modem.

Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) 232 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

you may need to install one or more adjunct systems or devices. Issue 1 January 2008 233 . In addition. installations on page 280 Music-on-hold on page 281 Paging and announcement equipment on page 285 Adjunct Information Sources on page 286 For these adjunct systems. ! WARNING: WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire.Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems This appendix provides information and wiring examples of installation procedures for various telephone and console power supplies. Your planning documentation specifies the equipment you will be installing. Follow the instructions in: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application on page 237 INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system on page 239 Call center on page 239 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) on page 242 Terminal server installation on page 245 Call Detail Recording (CDR) on page 258 Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package on page 261 Printers on page 262 DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack on page 263 External modems on page 278 Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U. consult the documentation specific to the system for complete installation instructions.S. use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords when installing telephones or adjuncts.

Flush-Mounted Information Outlet 2. Each port network can provide power for up to three attendant consoles. 03-300151. Figure 143: 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug r7 4 9 4 2 8K L C0 6 0 3 9 6 Figure notes: 1. This source of power is preferred for the attendant consoles because it has the same battery backup as the G450 Media Gateway. for detailed power supply information and installation procedures. To Telephone 6. 400B2 Adapter 5. Destination Service Access Point (DSAP) Power Cord 234 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Refer to Documentation for Avaya Communication Manager. See Figure 143. Surface-Mounted Information Outlet 3.Power supplies and adjunct systems Typical adjunct power connections The 400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local -48 VDC power to a modular plug. To Individual Power Unit 4. Media Gateways and Servers CD.

Figure 144: Example Adjunct Power Connections 13 2 1 4 5 3 7 9 11 6 8 10 12 14 14 cydmapwr EWS 052898 Figure notes: 1. Individual power supply (Such as 1151B/ C) (Not used if item 14 is used) 3. Install at satellite location or equipment room (not both). 100P6A patch cord or jumpers 10. Auxiliary power for an attendant console The nonessential functions of an attendant console and its optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector console derive power from an auxiliary power source. Satellite location 14. Satellite site or adapter location 7. System side of MDF 11. Equipment room 13. Bulk power supply. Station side of MDF 9. 25-pair cable to digital line modular jack 12. Information outlet (modular jack) 5. Note: Only 1 console can derive auxiliary power from the system and through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk/auxiliary field. Note: A console’s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is: ● 800 ft (244 m) for a 302A1 Issue 1 January 2008 235 .Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end Figure 144 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power. 4-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable 6. 400B2 adapter 4. 25-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable 8. Provide auxiliary power for an attendant console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages. Typical display telephone 2.

See Table 25.14 mm2) Feet Meters 236 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Power supplies and adjunct systems ● 350 ft (107 m) for a 301B1 and 302D An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from: ● ● ● ● Individual 1151B/C or 1151B2/C2 power supply MSP-1 power supply 258A-type adapters Bulk power supplies Local and Phantom Power An attendant console’s maximum distance from the system is limited.26 mm2) Feet Meters 26 AWG Wire (0. Table 25: Attendant Console Cabling Distances Enhanced Attendant Console (302D) With Selector Console Phantom powered Locally powered Without Selector Console Phantom powered Locally powered 1400 5000 427 1524 900 3400 274 1037 800 5000 244 1524 500 3400 152 1037 24 AWG Wire (0.

711 format.Downloading and updating the license file for feature activation . Upgrades. Note: For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations.Updating and upgrading software IP address for administration access General Alarm Manager for alarm display Web interface to start and stop the system ● ● ● The IA770 system also shares the same switch-tone parameters established for the S8300 Server. and converts text to speech. Issue 1 January 2008 237 . Then. and Troubleshooting. Note: ! CAUTION: CAUTION: IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging processes messages using the G. 11-300532. assign that codec set to a network region. With the IA770 system that uses a CWY1 board. the S8300 Server handles switch tones on behalf of the IA770 system and passes on the control information to the IA770 system using QSIG signaling. Without the need for additional hardware.0. And. Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency An IA770 uses many resources of the S8300 Server and the media gateway where it resides. see Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging. converts messages to the G.711 codec only. Release 3. ensure that a codec set exists that uses only the G. With the software-only version of the IA770 system that is currently sold. including translations and messages . IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software processes touchtones. finally.IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application The IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application runs on a G450 Media Gateway controlled by an S8300 Server. the installer or administrator must set IA770 parameters to match those of the S8300 Server.711 codec.Backing up and restoring data over a LAN or a WAN. Installation. Therefore. The following list outlines the S8300’s shared resources used by the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX system: ● ● Hardware for data storage and retrieval TFTP server for: . assign that network region to the AUDIX signaling group that is linked to the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging trunk group.

The virtual trunk group. you must administer the hunt group using Communication Manager.0. IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300 upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX The INTUITY AUDIX software must be installed or upgraded at the same time as the S8300 Communication Manager software load (the . The use of trunks replaces the need for voice ports in the hunt group. The hunt group setup is also handled automatically when you install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard. an INTUITY AUDIX hunt group must still be defined. COS. The number of trunks assigned to the trunk group can be either 3. Otherwise. Installation. However. Note: For upgrades only. For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging. The INTUITY AUDIX system software is loaded directly onto the S8300 hard drive. Upgrades. you must administer the trunk group. or 12. such as creating COR. The Communication Manager installation tools install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX automatically.Power supplies and adjunct systems Where is the IA770 location and software IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging is a software-only version of INTUITY AUDIX messaging that uses a QSIG-MWI H. Other switch administration tasks that are associated with proper hunt group functions. 11-300532. an H.rpm files). Note: Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for new systems For new systems. 6.323 virtual trunk for communication between the Communication Manager and IA770 software. a G450 Media Gateway that previously used a CWY1 board can continue to use the CWY1 board with IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software. and coverage paths. Release 3. setup is handled automatically when you install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard. and the assigned network region and IP codec set with Communication Manager once the software is installed. its signaling group. The IA770 software is delivered on the Communication Manager software distribution CD. and signaling group.323 virtual trunk integration must be established. However. are also required. and Troubleshooting. Otherwise. 238 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . the CWY1 board is no longer available for new systems.

Avaya Call Center Basic . The G450 announcement software has many of the functions of the TN2501AP VAL circuit pack. The information is contained in a document with the title INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1. 585-313-818. see the Issue 1 January 2008 239 . See Table 26 for differences between the Avaya G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack. The S8300 Server with the G450 Media Gateway supports the following call center capabilities: ● All three Avaya call center packages: . For more information on Avaya G450 Announcement software.Avaya Call Center Elite Up to 450 agents A maximum of 16 ASAI links Avaya G450 announcement software ● ● ● About Avaya G450 announcement software Voice announcements are used in a call center environment to announce delays.0 Documentation. and entertain and inform calling parties. The procedures for this process are fully documented in INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1.INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system The process of integrating an INTUITY AUDIX LX system with an Avaya S8300 Server involves a series of tasks to prepare the switch to work with the INTUITY AUDIX LX system.Avaya Call Center Deluxe . The announcement capability is standard and comes co-resident on the G450.0 LAN Integration with S8300 and DEFINITY® Systems. Call center The S8300 Server provides an excellent solution for a small call center. direct customers to different departments.

Chapter 13.000 Backup and restore over LAN Recording method File portability to multiple DEFINITY or Avaya G450 Media Gateways Playback quality Backup speed Yes Use PC or telephone Yes Use PC or telephone Yes Toll quality 2. 03-300509. or S8700-series Server Yes Avaya G450 announcement software No Up to 45 minutes at 64Kbps uncompressed speech 1. S8500.000 when using the DEFINITY Server R.6 seconds for each 60 seconds of announcement time High Yes 1 of 2 Reliability Firmware downloadable 240 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . "Managing Announcements".Power supplies and adjunct systems Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. Table 26: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack Area description Requires hardware Maximum storage time Concurrent calls per announcement TN2501AP (VAL) circuit pack Yes Up to 60 minutes at 64Kbps sample rate 50 when using a DEFINITY Server SI or DEFINITY Server CSI 1.6 seconds for each 60 seconds of announcement time High Yes Toll quality 2.

000 DEFINITY Server R 3.000 KHz Mono 2 of 2 Issue 1 January 2008 241 .Call center Table 26: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack (continued) Area description Number of boards per system TN2501AP (VAL) circuit pack 5 on the DEFINITY CSI and DEFINITY SI 10 on the DEFINITY R and S8500 or S8700-series Server 32 Avaya G450 announcement software 10 per configuration Number of announcement ports Announcements per board Maximum number of announcements in a configuration Format Sample bits Sample rate Channels 64 1024 128 DEFINITY Server CSI or DEFINITY Server Si 1. or S8700-series Server CCITT A-law or u-law 8 8.000 KHz Mono 256 3.000 over multiple G450 Media Gateways CCITT A-law or u-law 8 8.000 S8500.

Avaya online UPSs feature: ● ● Isolation of connected equipment from all incoming power problems Doubled battery service life and advanced warning of the end of useful battery life with Advanced Battery Management (ABM) technology Prolonged backup time with Extended Battery Modules (EBMs) Conditioned incoming power without depleting the battery to preserve battery power for complete power outages Adapted to rack-mount and standalone tower applications with two-in-one form factor Standard RS-232 communications port Standard DEFINITY alarm contacts Six foot communications cable included Web/SNMP card to add direct control and monitoring capabilities in SNMP-based networks and via Web browsers (Optional for all models except select 1000 VA UPS) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● UPS models Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts) Holdover Time (mins) 6 8 16 8 UPS 750 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS. Avaya UPSs are a cost-effective measure to avoid costly downtime. It can keep the phones up and ensure network reliability.Power supplies and adjunct systems Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) The Avaya 1000-2000 VA online Uninterruptible power systems (UPSs) provide power protection for telecommunications systems and equipment. but it also provides customizable alarm and monitoring capabilities. RoHS 1000 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS. RoHS 1440 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS.0% 75. RoHS 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card UPS Capacity used 100.0% 52.0% SAP 700427073 700427081 700427099 700290273 1 of 2 242 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The Avaya UPS provides complete isolation from power disturbances to protect customer’s data and equipment.1% 75.

Web card.0% 50. 4-post Rail 1500VA Online UPS w/3 EBM. 4-post Rail 3000 VA Online UPS with 4 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/1 XBU48 and Web/ SNMP Card UPS Capacity used 50.Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts) Holdover Time (mins) 24 68 UPS 1500 VA Online UPS w/Web card + Rail Kit 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card and 1 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/1 EBM. Web card.0% 253 50.0% 167 50.0% 143 75.0% Issue 1 January 2008 243 .0% 360 720 25. 4-post Rail 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card and 2 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/2 EBM. 4-post Rail 1500VA Online UPS w/4 EBM. Web card. Web card.0% SAP 194384 (1) 700290273 (1) 700404411 (1) 194384 (1) 700404429 (1) 700290273 (2) 700404411 (1) 194384 (2) 700404429 (1) 194384 (3) 700404429 (1) 194384 (4) 700404429 (1) 181588 (4) 700404577 (1) 194384 (1) 700404486 2 of 2 Battery runtimes (in minutes)1 1000 VA Model Load 200 VA / 140 W 400 VA / 280 W 700 VA / 490 W Std Internal Batteries 37 19 9 (1) 24V EBM 271 142 72 (2) 24V EBMs 546 278 156 1 of 2 89 50.0% 75.0% 344 50.

etc.asp. This table provides typical information.com/avaya/default. Runtimes are approximate and may vary with equipment. temperature. Full Details on these units can be found in Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager. battery age. configuration.avayaups.Power supplies and adjunct systems Battery runtimes (in minutes)1 1000 VA Model Load 850 VA / 595 W 1000 VA / 700 W Std Internal Batteries 6 5 (1) 24V EBM 59 48 (2) 24V EBMs 124 104 2 of 2 1. 244 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . You can also go online to find out the latest details about UPS technology at http://www. 555-245-207.

Avaya supports the IOLAN+ 104 terminal server. but that does support an RS-232 interface. 10/100Base-T Hub (optional) 4. can connect through a terminal server. System printers and some CDR devices use RS-232 connections and can connect through a terminal server. Figure 145: Switch-to-adjunct LAN connectivity through a terminal server 1 6 2 LAN 3 1 2 3 4 4 DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY . terminal server 5. serial port 6. switch 2. CDR adjunct Issue 1 January 2008 245 .Terminal server installation Terminal server installation This section provides information on connecting adjunct equipment to a G450 Media Gateway with an S8300 Server using a terminal server (see Figure 145). IP connection on an S8300/G450 configuration 3.NOT FOR TELECOM USE 5 10BASE-T 5VDC cydfadj KLC 091302 Figure notes: 1. Any device that does not support a direct TCP/IP connection. You can connect up to four adjuncts through one terminal server.

or CAT5 cross connect hardware and connecting blocks RJ45 UTP Category 5 modular cords 451A in-line RJ45 adapters. or 10/100Base-T auto-sensing LAN hub or router 259A adapter. as needed to connect modular cords together Qty 1 4 1 1 or more 1 or more 1 1 1 Supplier Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Customer Avaya Customer Customer 1–2 You also need a computer (laptop) with the HyperTerminal software program for the initial administration of the IOLAN+ and to set up the ports. Table 27: Required equipment Comcode 700015084 NA NA NA 405369042 846943306 or 104154414 NA 102631413 NA NA NA Description 700409519 CUST SOL TERM SRVR 4PT RHS RJ45-to-DB25 connector for IOLAN+ (supplied with 700015084) DB25-to-DB9 connector for PC COM port RS-232 Null modem (if needed for PC or printer connectivity) Male/female adapter (if necessary) 6-inch RJ45 crossover cord.Power supplies and adjunct systems Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal server Make sure you have all the equipment on site before the installation. 246 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . You must have the hardware listed in Table 27.

to achieve greater distance limits. the limit from the terminal server to the adjunct is 50 ft (15 meters). The distance limit from the LAN hub to the terminal server is 328 ft (100 meters). However.Terminal server installation What are the distance limits for the terminal server The distance limit from the switch to the LAN hub is 328 ft (100 meters). using the RJ45-to-DB25 cable and the null modem. Issue 1 January 2008 247 . Maximum Demarcation Point Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN Connect the adjunct to the IOLAN+. the switch’s LAN hub/router may be connected to a WAN and the hub/router for the terminal server also connected to the same WAN. If installed. Figure 146: Stand-alone call accounting system link using a terminal server 259A Adapter.cdr 328 ft max (100 m) 328 ft max (100 m) 50 Ft. 356A Adapter (Jack #1). or 258B Adapter (Jack #1) Standalone Call Accounting Switch Terminal Server C-LAN RJ45 Cat 5 Modular Cord AC Power Hub or Router RJ45 Cat 5 Modular Cord M25A or M25B RS232 Cable « Call Accounting Port clan2gca. How is the terminal server cabling connected Figure 146 shows the connection between the terminal server port and a call accounting system. You can use a male/female adapter (see Figure 147).

Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer on page 249 3. Note: Note: Administering the IOLAN+ To administer the IOLAN+ the first time. DB25-to-DB9 cable Follow these typical steps: Note: Depending on the adjunct’s connections.Power supplies and adjunct systems Figure 147: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+ 8 6 2 cydfrcon KLC 021201 5 7 5 4 1 7 DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY . Administering the IOLAN+ the first time on page 249 248 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . 2. PC or laptop (for initial administration) 7. data may not transfer correctly. Null modem 6. Connect the RJ-45 end to any port on the IOLAN+. 2. IP connection on an S8300/G450 Local area network (LAN) IOLAN+ 104 terminal server Adjunct (system management terminal or a system printer. Follow these typical steps: 1. you must connect a PC or laptop to the RS-232 Port 1 on the IOLAN+ terminal server. 1. you may not need all of these pieces. Without it. Connecting the IOLAN+ on page 249 2. Connect the null modem adapter to COM1 port on the adjunct.NOT FOR TELECOM USE 3 10BASE-T 5VDC 1 2 3 4 Figure notes: 1. for example) 5. 4. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable. 3. Note: The null modem is an important element in this setup. 3. DB25-to-RJ45 cable 8.

Rebooting the IOLAN+ on page 252 Note: Depending on the computer’s COM port. 4. select COM n. 3. Set the bits per second field to 9600. Set the Flow control field to Hardware. Press ENTER to get the login prompt. 4. 5. Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer 1. Note: Connecting the IOLAN+ 1. Click OK. you may not need all of these pieces. 2. At the login prompt type any text and press ENTER. Administering the IOLAN+ the first time 1. Open HyperTerminal. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable. Issue 1 January 2008 249 . Connect the DB25 end to the null modem adapter. b.Terminal server installation 4. make sure you have the following information: ● ● ● ● New IP address and subnet mask for IOLAN+ Host name for IOLAN+ IP address of S8300 Server Ethernet interface Port number of S8300 Server Ethernet interface where adjunct connects Use the HyperTerminal software program that comes with Windows 95/98/NT/2000 to administer the IOLAN+. 3. Click CONFIGURE a. Connect the RJ-45 end to Port 1 of the IOLAN+. 5. 2. Before beginning the initial administration. a. Click the File > Properties > Connect tab. Connect the DB9 end of the DB9-to-DB25 cable to the COM port on the PC or laptop. where n is the communication port your computer is using. In the Connect using: field.

00 a CDi iolan-st 5. Name: port 2 CONNECTIONS MENU Terminal: 2 Connection 1 2 3 4 Host *** *** *** *** FREE FREE FREE FREE ** ** ** ** === Commands === | Telnet ^T| | Rlogin ^R| | Port ^P| | Admin mode ^A| | CLI | | Lock | | Logout ^D| ================ ___________________________________________________________________________ IOLAN PLUS v4. and press ENTER. the default password.Power supplies and adjunct systems 2. Specify password to allow modification of menu items. Return to connections menu. Examine Server statistics. Examine/modify Server parameters. At the second prompt type set term ansi and press ENTER to view the Connections Menu.00 a CDi iolan 3.02.02. Password [ ] ___________________________________________________________________________ IOLAN PLUS v4. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER. 4. Name: port 2 ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2 gateway host line password port quit server stats Examine/modify gateway table. The Administration Menu changes. offering more options. Terminal configuration organised by line. Type iolan. Under Connection select Port 1 (the port to which the adjunct is connected) and press ENTER to access the Commands menu. 250 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Examine/modify host table. Terminal configuration organised by port.

Terminal server installation

6. Select server and press ENTER to view the Server Configuration menu.
** Administrator ** SERVER CONFIGURATION Terminal: 2

Name [iolan ] Debug mode [0 ] IP address [123.45.67.89 ] Subnet mask [222.222.0.0 ] Ethernet address [00:80:d4:03:11:cd] Ethernet interface [AUTO] Language [English ] Identification [ ] Lock [Disabled] Password limit [5 ] CR to initiate [No ] SNAP encoding [Disabled] Boot host [ ] Boot diagnostics [Enabled ] Boot file [ ] Init file [ ] MOTD file [ ] Domain name [ ] Name server [ ] NS Port [53 ] WINS server [ ] ___________________________________________________________________________ Name used for prompts and message on bottom right of screen. IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan

7. Fill in the following fields with information appropriate to your network. Leave the default settings for the other fields.
● ● ●

Name: IP address: (for IOLAN+) Subnet mask:

8. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes. You must reboot the server any time you change an IP address or Local Port value.

Issue 1 January 2008

251

Power supplies and adjunct systems

Rebooting the IOLAN+
1. Press ENTER to view the Administration Menu.
** Administrator ** ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2

access change gateway host kill line port quit reboot server stats trap

Remote System Access (PPP). Change login and/or admin password. Examine/modify gateway table. Examine/modify host table. Kill TCP connections on serial line. Terminal configuration organised by line. Terminal configuration organised by port. Return to connections menu. Reboot Server. Examine/modify Server parameters. Examine Server statistics. Examine/modify SNMP Trap parameters.

Port

[2

]

____________________________________________________________________________

IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi

iolan

Note:

Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN through its IP address. 2. Select reboot and press ENTER. 3. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.

Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server
Refer to the IOLAN+ user guide for details. In general, you must:
● ● ●

Use the arrow keys to move to a menu item Use the TAB key to move from field to field horizontally Use the ENTER key to choose an item

252 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Terminal server installation

Administering the gateway
You need to administer the gateway only if the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are not in the same subnet. Note: If the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are in the same subnet, skip this procedure. 1. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER. 2. Type iolan and press ENTER. 3. Select gateway to access the Gateway menu. 4. Fill in the following fields for Entry 1:
● ● ●

Note:

Destination: S8300 Server IP address Gateway: Gateway address Netmask: Subnet mask

Note:

Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN through your gateway. 5. Select reboot and press ENTER. 6. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.

Administering an IOLAN+ port
Use this procedure when connecting an adjunct or serial COM port on a PC directly (locally) to the IOLAN+ (see Figure 147: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+ on page 248). 1. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER. 2. Type iolan and press ENTER. 3. Select port and press ENTER.

Issue 1 January 2008

253

Power supplies and adjunct systems

4. Type port number and press ENTER to view the Port Setup Menu where port number is the port that the adjunct connects to.
** Administrator ** Hardware Speed [9600 ] Parity [None] Bit [8] Stop [1 ] Break [Disabled] Monitor DSR [Yes ] Monitor DCD [No ] User Name [port 2 ] Terminal type [undef ] TERM [ ] Video pages [0] CLI/Menu [CLI] Reset Term [No ] PORT SETUP MENU Flow ctrl Flow ctrl [xon/xoff] Input Flow [Enabled ] Output Flow [Enabled ] IP Addresses Src [ Dst [ Terminal: 2 Keys Hot Quit Del Echo Mask [^]] [^@] [^@] [^@] [ Intr Kill Sess [^C] [^U] [^@]

] ]

]

Options Keepalive [No ] Rlogin/Telnet [Telnet] Debug options [No ] Map CR to CR LF [No ] Hex data [No ] Secure [No ] MOTD [No ]

Access Access [Remote ] Authentication [None ] Mode [Raw ] Connection [None ] Host [ ] Remote Port [0 ] Local Port [5101]

________________________________________________________________________________

IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi

iolan

5. Fill in the following fields. Leave the default settings for the other fields.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Speed: 9600 Monitor DSR: Yes Monitor DCD: No Name: port number or other descriptive name Terminal type: undef CLI/Menu: CLI Reset Term: No Flow ctrl: xon/xoff IP addresses: leave blank Mask: leave blank Access: Remote Authentication: None Mode: Raw Connection: None

254 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Terminal server installation

● ● ●

Host: leave blank or enter S8300 Server IP Address Remote Port: 0 Local Port: must match the value of Remote Port on the IP Services screen of the Communication Manager software

6. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes. 7. Press ENTER again to view the Administration Menu. 8. Select kill to disable the port connection. 9. Repeat the steps for each additional port you want to administer. 10. When administration is complete, from the Connections Menu, select logout (or press Ctrl D). 11. Close HyperTerminal. At this point, you have established a connection path from the adjunct through the IOLAN+ to the S8300 Server.

Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+
1. On the system management terminal, press ENTER to get the login prompt to the Communication Manager switch. Note: If you get garbled text, check the baud rate setting on the Port Setup Menu. You can adjust it up or down. 2. If no login prompt appears, log back into the IOLAN+ through HyperTerminal. 3. Select Admin mode > stats and press ENTER twice. 4. Select users and press ENTER.

Note:

Issue 1 January 2008

255

Power supplies and adjunct systems

5. Look at the port that the adjunct is connected to and see if there is any traffic. If not, check all your connections and administration fields.
** Administrator ** 1. port1 2. port 2 3. port 3 4. port 4 modem REM <unknown> LOG SERVER STATISTICS Terminal: 2 Talking to host 172.22.22.67.5111<DSR+CTS+DCD >DTR+RTS SERVER STATISTICS <DSR+DCD >DTR+RTS waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS logged out logger not enabled

___________________________________________________________________________

Press <RETURN> to see list of options. IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi

iolan-st

After you have successfully administered and validated the connection between the adjunct and the S8300 Server through the IOLAN+, you can disconnect the laptop or other PC from the IOLAN+. No further IOLAN+ administration is required.

Potential failure scenarios and repair actions
If a link goes down between the terminal server and the switch, you must reboot the terminal server for the link come back up. If you are performing a software upgrade or if a system reset occurs, you must reboot the terminal server to restore the link. See Rebooting the IOLAN+ on page 252 for instructions.

Administering IP services
For each adjunct that you connect using TCP/IP, you need to administer IP services to establish the IP address/TCP port pairing. The IP address is associated with the node name that you just administered. In this example, we are administering the primary call detail recording (CDR) connection as end-to-end TCP/IP. 1. Type change ip-services and press ENTER to assign the CDR endpoint.

256 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

In this example. 5. enter the TCP listen port assigned to the adjunct. Consult the documentation for your Call Accounting system to determine the appropriate port for the CDR device. 4. For the call accounting application. change ip-services IP SERVICES Local Remote Port Node 0 callacctg Page 1 of 3 Service Type CDR1 Enabled Local Node procr Remote Port 5101 3. 6. enter CDR1 for the call accounting link. You cannot make an entry in this field. 7. In the Remote Node field. this number must match the Local Port number on the Port Setup menu. this must match the port administered in the Server application. Go to Page 3 and type n in the Reliable Protocol field for the CDR Service Type. enter the node name for the adjunct. In the Remote Port field. You do not use RSP with a terminal server. type callacctg. enter the node name for the switch. Note: This number must match the port administered on the end device. change ip-services SESSION LAYER TIMERS Packet Resp Session Connect Timer Message Cntr 3 1 Page 3 of 3 Note: Service Type CDR1 Reliable Protocol n SPDU Cntr 1 Connectivity Timer 1 8. Press ENTER to save your changes. If you are using a terminal server.Terminal server installation 2. In the Local Node field. If you are using the Downloadable Reliable Session-Layer Protocol tool. as administered on the Node Names screen. The recommended value for CDR1 is 5101. In the Service Type field. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications. enter procr. Issue 1 January 2008 257 .

start the application to listen for a client connection at the port. If the CDR adjunct is an application that uses RSP. Note: Administering CDR data collection Note: Note: To send CDR data using a processor Ethernet interface to a device on the LAN/ WAN. In the Remote Port field. and do the following: a. Record the IP address and the port number of the CDR adjunct. 2. c. 1. In the Service Type field. which could be a terminal server or a CDR application that uses RSP. In the Local Node field. the CDR adjunct may be a terminal server or a CDR application using RSP. 258 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . you have the option to enable/disable RSP. Note: A printer or customer premises equipment (CPE) can also be used as the output receiving device. d. In the Remote Node field. b. As with C-LAN connections. f. enter the node name you assigned to the CDR adjunct in step 2. e. Connecting CDR equipment The interface between an Avaya server and CDR equipment is a Processor Ethernet Connection. enter procr. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications. Setup the CDR adjunct to be ready to collect CDR data. enter CDR1 or CDR2. Access the IP Services screen in Communication Manager (see Administering IP services on page 256). enter the port number used by the CDR adjunct determined in step 1.Power supplies and adjunct systems Call Detail Recording (CDR) This section provides information on connecting Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment. You cannot make an entry in this field.

Digits to Hide: 0 CDR Account Code Length: 4 2.Record: member-ext Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? n Record Called Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member? n Inc Trk Call Splitting? n Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? n Call Record Handling Option: warning Record Call-Assoc TSC? n Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: dialed Privacy . see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. b. Administer CDR parameters as described in Administering CDR parameters on page 259. In the example. respectively). 1. you would use printer. complete the Packet Resp Timer and Connectivity Timer fields with a reasonable value that matches the network condition (recommended values are 30 and 60 seconds. Administering CDR parameters You must administer CDR parameters to let the system know that the adjunct is connected through TCP/IP. if necessary. d. If RSP is being used. 03-300509. Issue 1 January 2008 259 . For details on all fields on the CDR System Parameters screen. unformatted is used. c.Call Detail Recording (CDR) 3. Type change system-parameters cdr and press ENTER. If you were sending data directly to a printer. The CDR System Parameters screen appears. Enter n if the CDR adjunct is connected through a terminal server. 4. Enter y in the Reliable Protocol field if you have a CDR application using RSP. change system-parameters cdr CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 1 of 1 Node Number (Local PBX ID): CDR Date Format: month/day Primary Output Format: unformatted Primary Output Endpoint: CDR1 Secondary Output Format: unformatted Secondary Output Endpoint: CDR2 Use ISDN Layouts? n EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600 Use Enhanced Formats? n Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls? n Modified Circuit ID Display? n Remove # From Called Number? n Record Outgoing Calls Only? y Intra-switch CDR? n Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? y CDR Call Splitting? y Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? n Outg Attd Call Record? y Interworking Feat-flag? n Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form? n Calls to Hunt Group . In the Primary Output Format field. Go to Page 3 and do the following: a. Accept the defaults in the other fields. enter a format specific to the call accounting system.

see Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Additional administration procedures for CDR equipment are provided in the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. For more information about these commands. 5. If a link does not come up immediately. type CDR1. and that device is also connected through TCP/IP. 260 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . status cdr-link CDR LINK STATUS Primary Link State: up Maintenance Busy? no Secondary extension not administered Work with the vendor to test the link from the call accounting adjunct.Power supplies and adjunct systems 3. Also. type CDR2 in the Secondary Output Endpoint field. Media Gateways and Servers. status. 03-300509. Testing the switch-to-adjunct link You can use the test. In the Primary Output Endpoint field. busyout and release commands to find and correct problems with CDR links. complete the Secondary Output Format field. If you use a secondary output device. Press ENTER to save your changes. use the busyout cdr-link and release cdr-link commands to bring up the link. 03-300431. 4.

The Install Shield Wizard steps you through the installation. In the Search For text box.Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package Avaya provides this free software application to help vendors and customers develop CDR applications that use the reliable session protocol to collect CDR data from an Avaya Server.0 MB in size. Installing the RDTT package 1. 4. ● The Server application (Server. Select Reliable Data Transport Client/Server Tool from the list of links that are found. Downloading the RDTT package The RDTT package is available from the Avaya Support website as a self-extracting executable. Issue 1 January 2008 261 . type reliable and click Go. Go to the Avaya Support website at http://avaya. 3. Double-click the RDTT. When asked.com/support. It is approximately 1.exe file to a temporary folder on your computer.exe file. save the RDTT. The Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) is a testing tool and thus is not supported by Avaya. What does the RDTT package contain The RDTT package consists of the following: ● ● Specifications for the Reliable Session Protocol The Client application (Client.6 to 2. 1.exe) This application is designed to help you test the reliable session protocol without use of an Avaya Server.exe) This application is designed to help you understand the reliable session protocol and to start building your products to work with the Avaya Server. 2. ● User Guide This document contains information about the client and server applications.

“Call Detail Recording” in Chapter 21. select both programs. Administering the RDTT package See the instructions in the user_guide. When prompted to select Client or Server. Use the default destination folder and program folder. 03-300509. 03-300509.Power supplies and adjunct systems 2. “Features and Technical Reference” in Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. Related topics See the following topics related to CDR: ● Chapter 16. see Terminal server installation on page 245 for more information. Continue with the installation.” in Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. 3.doc file to administer the RDTT tool on a PC. ● Printers For connecting a printer to a G450 Media Gateway. 262 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . “Collecting Billing Information.

Issue 1 January 2008 263 . the channel service unit (CSU) is integrated within the MM710 Media Module. Note: For G450 Media Gateway systems. if possible. This position provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote loopback tests are run. It should always be available for remote tests of the DS1 span.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack This section provides information on how to install and use a DS1 loopback jack to test the DS1 span between the Avaya Server or Gateway and the network interface point. The loopback jack is required when DC power is at the interface to the MM710 media module. This means that there is no need for a separate external device. install the loopback jack at the extended demarcation point. Note: Note: This section covers: ● ● ● ● ● Installing a loopback jack on page 263 Administering a loopback jack on page 264 Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 265 Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 274 Configurations using fiber multiplexers on page 276 Installing a loopback jack You can use one of two installation options: ● ● Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 264 Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 264 Selecting the loopback jack installation method Select the installation method as follows: ● Install the loopback jack at the interface to the smart jack. The loopback jack isolates the MM710 internal CSU from the DC power and properly loops the DC span power. ● If the smart jack is not accessible. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation.

If there is an extended demarcation point. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point. See Figure 151 through Figure 152. At the management terminal. ● ● Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack 1.Power supplies and adjunct systems ● If there is no extended demarcation point. choose the one that is closest to the Interface Termination feed or the fiber MUX. 3. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. but the smart jack is accessible. if there is more than one dumb block. install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 149. 2. Refer to Figure 151 and Figure 152. 2. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point. However. See Figure 148 through Figure 150. 1. install the loopback jack directly at the network interface point as shown in Figure 148. to provide maximum coverage for loopback jack tests. and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. type change ds1 location where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack. 264 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack. 3. install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 150. and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. This is not a test tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point. Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. If there is an extended demarcation point and the smart jack is not accessible. Note: Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack Install the loopback jack at the point where the cabling from the MM710 plugs into the dumb block. This is not a test tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span. Note: Administering a loopback jack 1.

Checking the integrity of local equipment Before you go any further. to the loopback jack. The first part of the test powers-up the loopback jack and sends a signal from the DS1 circuit pack. Always perform both parts of the test. The last is the responsibility of the DS1 service provider. through the wiring. The test allows about 10 seconds for the signal to loop around the loopback jack and return to the DS1 circuit pack. These three sections are: ● ● ● From the MM710 to the loopback jack From the loopback jack to the smart jack (network interface point) From the smart jack to the CO The first two sections are your responsibility. Then it sends the results to the management terminal and proceeds to the second part of the test. and back to a bit error detector and counter on the DS1 board. Proceed as follows. make sure that the problem is actually on the DS1 span by testing the equipment that connects to the span at the near end. Issue 1 January 2008 265 . 4. Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility and allows the technician to determine that the facility is available for remote testing. Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack The loopback jack and smart jack isolate faults by dividing the DS1 span into three sections (see Figure 148 through Figure 150). On page 2 of the form. Test the DS1 circuit pack. Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack The DS1 span test has 2 parts: ● Checking for circuit connectivity between the DS1 circuit pack and the loopback jack. A bit-error rate counter displays the results on the management terminal until you terminate the test. change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y. 3-in-24 DS1 stress-testing pattern from the DS1 board. through the loopback jack. ● The second part of the test sends the standard.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack 2. Verify that the near-end CSU type is set to integrated. 3. and perform any needed maintenance or repairs. Enter save translation to save the new information.

If the value of the TX LBO field is not 0dB. 4. 6. If FAIL still appears after the loopback jack has been replaced. and verify that the value of the TX LBO field is 0dB. 002). suspect a wiring problem. Make sure that the near-end csu type field is set to integrated. the first set of results appears on the terminal. and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example. DS1 facility alarms (if any) clear. type busyout board XXXVS where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example. On the SAT. 266 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . V3). After about 20 seconds. checking the integrity of transmitted data. Press ENTER to make the changes. Then set the TX LBO field to 0dB for testing. where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example. Active. When PASS appears on the terminal. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS cpe-loopback-jack. proceed with the second part of the test. Then repeat step 8. 2. Type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form. 7. V3). Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form. The loopback jack powers up. Replace the cable between the MM710 and the loopback jack. record the current value. Isolate the problem by replacing the loopback jack and repeating step 8. 002). there may be a fault in the wiring between the MM710 and the loopback jack or the loopback jack may itself be faulty. If FAIL appears on the terminal display. and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example. 5. 10. 9. 8. 3.Power supplies and adjunct systems 1.

3. Note: The loss of signal (LOS) alarm (demand test #138) is not processed during this test while the 3-in-24 pattern is active. Note: Issue 1 January 2008 267 . Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count. 1. 002). 4. and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example. Type clear meas ds1 log XXXVS to zero out the performance measurement counter. V3). Type clear meas ds1 esf XXXVS to zero out the ESF error count. checking for data errors. At the SAT.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop Now perform the second part of the test. type clear meas ds1 loop XXXVS to zero out the bit-error counter where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example. 2.

268 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Power supplies and adjunct systems 5. The value of the Bit-error count field is non-zero The value of the Synchronized field is Y The value of the Bit-error count field pegs at 65535 or increments by 100s or 1000s each time you repeat step 1 The value of the Bit-error count field is 0 Once you are fairly certain that the test is reporting no errors (after at least 1 error-free minute). Wiring may need replacement. If the test reports no errors for 1 minute. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS inject-single-bit-error. Check for intermittent connections or broken wires in an SPE receive or transmit pair. the error rate is less than 1 in 108. or impedance imbalances between the two conductors of the receive or transmit pair. 6. Verify this by repeating step 1 at 1-minute to 10-minute intervals until you are certain. the error rate is less than 1 in 109. 7. confirm that the 3-in-24 pattern error detector is operating. severe crosstalk. and repair as necessary. Retry the test 5 times. Then repeat step 1. There are no obvious wiring problems. V3). Suspect loose or corroded connections. The DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to the looped 3-in-24 pattern and is counting bit errors in the pattern. 002). Excessive bit errors are likely. and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example. Repeat step 1 several times. Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count again. Table 28: DS1 Troubleshooting Condition The value of the Test: cpe-loopback-jack field is Pattern 3-in-24 The value of the Synchronized field is N The value of the Synchronized field remains N after 5 tries Solution The loopback jack test is active. If the test reports no errors for 10 minutes. where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example. Step through Table 28 to troubleshoot.

Table 30: Evaluation of DS1 CPE loopback and service provider test results Condition Loopback termination fails with an error code of 1313 Loopback termination still fails The DS1 cannot frame on the incoming span’s signal after the loopback jack power down Solution The span is still looped somewhere. If the MM710 media module successfully passes the CPE Loopback Jack test. The span failed the service provider’s loopback test The service provider successfully loop tested the span. up to the smart jack You cannot locate and repair the problem in the time available and must terminate the test The test terminated normally Issue 1 January 2008 269 . possibly at the loopback jack. or there is something wrong with the MM710 media module itself. Test and make repairs as needed. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to end the test. Proceed with step 10. 9. Table 29: DS1 Bit-error count troubleshooting Condition The value of the Bit-error count field is greater than 1 The value of the Bit-error count field is 1 Solution Replace the DS1 circuit pack. or somewhere in the network. and retest. Wait about 30 seconds for the DS1 to reframe on the incoming signal and clear DS1 facility alarms. insert a transmit to receive loop around and verify that the MM710 can frame to its own signal. Replace the DS1 circuit pack. Step through Table 29 to troubleshoot. then the wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack is suspect. The problem is in the service provider’s network. To rule out the MM710 media module. The test passed. Use Table 30 to evaluate the test results and to determine the solution. Enter reset board XXXVS. at the MM710. Either there is something wrong with the receive signal into the loopback jack from the dumb block or the smart jack. and repeat the test. The test will not terminate normally in the absence of a good framing signal. You have to reset the circuit pack.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack 8.

Run a far-end MM710 line loopback. Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form. Leave the loopback jack in place. and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example. b. type release board XXXVS. Examine the bit-error counts. Press ENTER to save the changes. there is a problem on the network side. type test ds1-loop XXXVS far-csu-loopback-test-begin where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example. 11. Have the service provider correct it. 002). c. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate the test. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local DS1 payload loopback test. Have the service provider run a smart-jack loopback test against the network interface wiring that links the smart jack to the CO (section 3 in Figure 148 through Figure 150). 2. Change the value of the TX LBO field to the original value that you wrote down when you were administering the DS1 for the test. b. type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form. You must coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider. To restore DS1 administration: a. V3). To release the DS1 circuit pack: a. d. 1. b. If the tests fails. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local MM710 line loopback test. Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack Note: This test cannot isolate the problem if there are problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. 2. At the SAT. Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) 1. as in Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop on page 267. 3. using the following procedure: a. c. Note: Test the short length of customer premises wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack (Section 2 in the following 3 figures) using a loopback that overlaps this section of the span. From the SAT.Power supplies and adjunct systems 10. At the SAT. 270 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6. Network interface smart jack 9. there is a problem between the loopback jack to the smart jack. Figure 148: Network interface at smart jack for an MM710 multi-media module SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. Work with the service provider to isolate the fault. Central office Issue 1 January 2008 271 . Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) 10. Loopback jack 8. 5. 4. 3. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) 7.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack If the tests fails and there were no problems Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack or Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX). 2.

9. 5. 7. 10.Power supplies and adjunct systems Figure 149: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack inaccessible) for an MM710 multi-media module SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. 2. 4. Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (extended demarcation) Network interface smart jack Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office 272 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . 3. 11. 8.

11. 4. 3. 8. 7. 9. 10. 5. 2.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack Figure 150: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack accessible) for an MM710 multi-media module SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. 12. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Dumb block (extended demarcation) Loopback jack Network interface smart jack Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office Dumb block to smart jack RJ-48 Issue 1 January 2008 273 . Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6.

Span section 1 Span section 2 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 5. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (demarcation point) Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office 274 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Section 2 includes the short cable from the loopback jack to the dumb block demarcation point (part of the loopback jack). 6. This cable is the only part of Section 2 that is part of customer premises wiring. 8. See Figure 151 and Figure 152.Power supplies and adjunct systems Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack When the loopback jack is added to a span that does not contain a smart jack. 7. 4. Figure 151: Network interface at “dumb” block for an MM710 multi-media module SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. 2. the span is divided into two sections: from the MM710 to the loopback jack and from the loopback jack to the central office (CO). It is not covered in the loopback jack’s loopback path. 3. 9.

which the DS1 service provider at the CO end typically activates. This can be done using a loopback that “overlaps” the section of the span. Span section 1 Span section 2 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 5. 3. 6.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack Figure 152: Network interface at “dumb” block with repeater line to fiber MUX for an MM710 multi-media module SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the majority of section 2. 9. 8. Issue 1 January 2008 275 . 2. Any of the following loopbacks can do this: ● The local MM710’s line loopback. 2. 7. tests. Test the loopback jack-to-dumb block and dumb block-to-CO wiring (section 2 in Figure 151 and Figure 152). RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (demarcation point) Repeater Fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office You are responsible for finding and correcting problems in the customer wiring (section 1 and the loopback cable portion of section 2). and then deactivates. 4. 1. as described in Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack on page 270. Test customer premises wiring from the MM710 to the loopback jack. 10.

Fiber MUXs can take the place of Interface termination feeds as shown in Figure 148 through Figure 151. If the DS1 Span Test confirms that there are no problems in Section 1. d. This requires that the MM710 CSU be set so it can be used on DS1 wiring to the MUX. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate this test. the problem is in the cable between the loopback jack and the “dumb” block. Inform the DS1 provider that loopback tests of the CPE wiring to the “dumb” block (section 1) showed no problems. If the test passes. ● Bit error counts are examined as described in Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack on page 265. which the DS1 service provider at the CO end activates and tests. the technician should proceed as follows to avoid unnecessary dispatch: a. This test only isolates problems to Section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack. Identify and contact the DS1 service provider. c. At the SAT type test ds1-loop location far-csu-loopback-test-begin to activate this test.Power supplies and adjunct systems ● The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback. Replace the loopback jack. Failure of any of these tests indicate a problem in Section 2. 276 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . If the far-end MM710 line loopback test failed. where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack. Request that the DS1 provider perform a loopback test of their portion of the Section 2 wiring by sending someone out to loop Section 2 back to the CO at the “dumb” block. inform the DS1 provider. If this test fails. This is the responsibility of the DS1 service provider. Configurations using fiber multiplexers Use the loopback jack when customer premises DS1 wiring connects to an on-site fiber multiplexer (MUX) and allows wiring to the network interface point on the MUX to be remotely tested. Test these spans using the same procedures as metallic spans. but is more likely to indicate a problem somewhere between the “dumb” block and the CO. Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider. The far-end MM710’s line loopback: a. This could mean bad loopback jack -to-”dumb” block cabling. the problem is in the service provider’s wiring. b. b.

A loopback jack is required in this configuration to properly isolate and terminate the DC power.DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack Note: Note: Fiber MUXs may have loopback capabilities that the service provider can activate from the CO end. Pin 4) to receive ring (R1. Pin 5) to receive tip (T1. These lines require DC power for the repeaters and this DC power is present at the “dumb” block interface to the CPE equipment. If the MUX provides the equivalent of a line loopback on the “problem” DS1 facility. These may loop the signal back to the CO or back to the DS1 MM710. Checking for the presence of DC 1. Pin 5) to transmit ring (R. activate it after a successful loopback jack test. Pin 1) All measurements should read 0 (zero) volts DC. Pin 2) to receive ring (R1. Issue 1 January 2008 277 . ! Important: Important: Be aware that there are installations that use repeater-augmented metallic lines between the MUX and the “dumb” block. Make the following four measurements at the network interface jack: ● ● ● ● From transmit tip (T. and use it to isolate problems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX. Pin 2) From transmit ring (R. Pin 4) From receive tip (T1. Pin 1) From transmit tip (T.

Power supplies and adjunct systems External modems The following section assumes that you are using one of the recommended external modems. Use the factory defaults. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the modem. start your terminal emulation software. Recommended modems include: ● Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 This section covers: ● ● ● ● Hardware required when configuring modems on page 278 Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 on page 278 Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL on page 279 Administering Multi-Tech modems on page 279 Hardware required when configuring modems To configure many modems. monitor. 278 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . you must first connect a terminal or a PC with a keyboard. so you can skip this section. Note: If your modem uses a USB connection. and terminal-emulation software to the modem. model MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. or S8700-series configuration. 2. use the USB ports instead of the serial port. as follows: 1. Also. This modem is used for sending alarms. any locally obtained. type-approved external modem should work. If you are using a PC. S8500. Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to an RS-232. Contact your Avaya representative for more information. However. as well as for remote dial up to the server for maintenance and administration. Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech USB modem. AT commands are not required. Note: Before you can enter AT configuration commands. 3. serial-communications port (often called a COM port) on the terminal or PC. you use the Hayes-compatible AT command set. with an S8300/700.

External modems

Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem
In the United States, the Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-US-V92 modem gets configured automatically through the USB port with the factory defaults. No special configuration is necessary. In a non-US country, the modem may require settings specific to the country in which the modem will be used.

Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL
Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech serial modem, model MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL, with a G450 media gateway. The Multi-Tech serial modem connects the G450 media gateway to an external trunk. This connection enables remote dial in capability for administration and troubleshooting.

Administering Multi-Tech modems
The Multi-Tech modems do not require administration if used in the United States. In non-US countries, these modems may require administration. For the full range of modem options, see the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509.

Issue 1 January 2008

279

Power supplies and adjunct systems

Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations
The customer-provided busy tone disconnect adjunct detects busy tone disconnects of incoming calls on loop-start, 2-wire, analog trunks. In some non-U.S. countries where a G450 Media Gateway is used, the PSTN sends busy tone as the disconnect signal. Therefore, the S8300 Server, G450 Media Gateway requires a busy tone disconnect adjunct. Figure 153 shows typical connections. Figure 153: Typical cabling for busy tone disconnect
1 2 3 4 4 2 4 5

cydf057 RPY 123097

Figure notes: 1. Public switched telephone network 2. Main distribution frame 3. Busy tone disconnect device 4. Tip and ring wires 5. To loop-start, central-office, trunk MM711 analog media module

280 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Music-on-hold

Music-on-hold
The music-on-hold (MOH) feature allows a caller to hear music when that caller is placed on hold. This section covers:
● ●

Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 281 Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 284

Music-on-hold can be provided:

Through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module to a customer-supplied music source on a G450 Media Gateway Through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module or MM714 Analog Media Module to a customer-supplied music source on a G450 Media Gateway

On a G450 Media Gateway, the music-on-hold feature is connected through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module or an MM714 Analog Media Module. The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Therefore, for S8300 Server users, the music-on-hold feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported. However, G450 Media Gateway users with an S8500 or S8700-series Server as primary controller can access the music-on-hold feature, if their equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk circuit pack in an EPN carrier of an S8500 or S8700-series system.

Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway
Figure 154 and Figure 155 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450 Media Gateway for a non-FCC-registered source. Note: The G350 Media Gateway’s physical connection with the MM711 Analog Media Module or MM714 Analog Media Module is the same as the G450 Media Gateway’s connection with the MM711 Analog Media Module. Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711 Analog Media Module.

Note:

Note:

Issue 1 January 2008

281

Power supplies and adjunct systems

Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L3 coupler
Figure 154: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L3 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM

MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1

USB

CONSOLE

SERVICES COMPACT FLASH

ETR

CCA

ETH WAN

ETH LAN

G450
RST ASB 6

2

CARD IN USE

1

2

3

4

5

V10 V1 V5

V2

V6

V3

V7

V4

V8

Figure notes: 1. G450 Media Gateway 2. MM711 Analog Media Module 3. RJ-45 connection 4. KS-23395-L3 coupler 5. RCA cord 6. Music source

1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Media Module, or to a port or trunk port in the MM714 Media Module. 2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L3 coupler. 3. Connect the KS-23395-L3 coupler to the customer-supplied music source. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to properly connect the music source to the KS-23395-L3 coupler. Normally, you simply use an RCA cord. 4. Administer the switch for the new equipment.

282 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Music-on-hold

Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler
Figure 155: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM

MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1

USB

CONSOLE

SERVICES COMPACT FLASH

ETR

CCA

ETH WAN

ETH LAN

G450
RST ASB 6

2

CARD IN USE

1

2

3

4

5

V10 V1 V5

V2

V6

V3

V7

V4

V8

Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. G450 Media Gateway MM711 Analog Media Module RJ-45 connection KS-23395-L4 coupler 5. 6. 7. 8. 8-pair modular cord 909A/B universal coupler 8-pair modular cord Music source

1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. 2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L4 coupler. 3. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the 909A/B universal coupler using a 8-pair modular cord. 4. Connect the 909A/B universal coupler to the music source using a 8-pair modular cord. 5. Administer the switch for the new equipment. Note: For additional installation information, refer to 909A/909B Universal Coupler Installation Instructions, which is normally shipped with the 909A/909B Universal Coupler.

Note:

Issue 1 January 2008

283

Power supplies and adjunct systems

Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway
Figure 156 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450 Media Gateway for an FCC-registered source. Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711 Analog Media Module.

Note:

Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler
Figure 156: FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM

MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1

USB

CONSOLE

SERVICES COMPACT FLASH

ETR

CCA

ETH WAN

ETH LAN

G450
RST ASB 6

2

CARD IN USE

1

2

3

4

5

V10 V1 V5

V2

V6

V3

V7

V4

V8

Figure notes: 1. G450 Media Gateway 2. MM711 Analog Media Module 3. RJ-45 connection 4. KS-23395-L4 coupler 5. 8-pair modular cord 6. Music source

1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. 2. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the customer-supplied music source. Normally, you simply use a 8-pair modular cord. 3. Administer the switch for the new equipment.

284 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

On a G450 Media Gateway. the loudspeaker paging feature is connected through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module. not the Loudspeaker Paging screen. Administer the M711 port on the SAT Station screen as an analog station. Issue 1 January 2008 285 . Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a customer-supplied telephone hybrid device. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. RJ-45 connection 4. dial dictation. Figure 157 shows the connections for loudspeaker paging. Users on a G450 Media Gateway controlled by an S8700-series or S8500 can also access the loudspeaker paging feature if equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk circuit pack in an PN carrier of an the S8700-series or S8500 system. G450 Media Gateway 2. 3. Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway Figure 157: Typical loudspeaker equipment connections for a G450 Media Gateway SYSTEM MDM ALM CPU PWR 1 USB CONSOLE SERVICES COMPACT FLASH ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450 RST ASB 6 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 V10 V1 V5 V2 V6 V3 V7 V4 V8 Figure notes: 1. The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to properly connect the telephone hybrid device to your loudspeaker paging system. or recorded announcement features on a G450 Media Gateway. the loudspeaker feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported on a G450 Media Gateway. 2. Universal Paging access module 3. Therefore.Paging and announcement equipment Paging and announcement equipment This section provides information on loudspeaker paging. The port is administered on the SAT Station screen. 4. Telephone hybrid (third party) device 5. Loudspeaker paging system 1.

This section covers: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Call Management System INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems Avaya Modular Messaging System Avaya Interactive Response Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations Avaya SIP Enablement Services Call Accounting Systems Call Management System For information on installing Call Management System R3V12. and Troubleshooting (585-215-783) Avaya CMS Sun Fire V880 Computer Hardware Installation. Adjunct Information Sources This section lists documents you can use for installation of some of the key adjunct systems that you can connect. and Troubleshooting Guide (585-215-117) Avaya Call Management System (CMS) Sun Enterprise 3500 Computer Hardware Installation. Maintenance.Power supplies and adjunct systems Note: Note: Do not administer the MM711 port on the SAT Loudspeaker Paging screen. and Troubleshooting (585-215-873) Avaya CMS R12 Sun Blade 100/150 Workstation Hardware Installation. Maintenance. and Troubleshooting (585-215-116) ● ● ● 286 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Maintenance. see the following: ● Avaya Call Management System (CMS) R12 Software Installation. Maintenance.

0. see the Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station (OPS) Installation and Administration Guide.Adjunct Information Sources INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems For information on installing INTUITY AUDIX Messaging systems. see INTUITY AUDIX LX Installation Checklist on the INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1 Documentation CD-ROM. 555-245-206.0 Documentation CD-ROM.avaya. see INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Installation for New Systems on the INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation CD-ROM.com. For IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging R1. see the SIP Enablement Services Implementation Guide. 11-300532. Issue 1 January 2008 287 . For INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging.3 Installation. and Troubleshooting Guide (07-300180) on the Avaya Interactive Response R1. 585-313-803. Release 3. go to http://support. and Troubleshooting. Upgrades. see Modular Messaging Release 2. Migration. Installation.3 (when available). see one of the following: ● For INTUITY AUDIX Release 5.0. 16-300140.1 Messaging. 210-100-500. see Avaya Interactive Response R1. ● ● ● Avaya Modular Messaging System For information on installing Avaya Modular Messaging systems.3 Documentation CD (07-300181). Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging. Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations For information on installing Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station systems. 585-313-818. and SIP Support in Avaya Communication Manager 4. 11-300121. Avaya SIP Enablement Services For information on installing Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES). Avaya Interactive Response For information on installing Avaya Interactive Response systems.

see the online help or documentation included with the eCAS software CD-ROM. 288 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .Power supplies and adjunct systems Call Accounting Systems For information on installing Call Accounting Systems.

laptop settings. The following lists are provided: ● ● Installer's Checklist: Tools.Appendix F: Information Checklists This appendix can be used as an aid for collecting necessary information for the installation of an Avaya G450 Media Gateway Media Gateway. customer network information Serial Number and Login Information: Serial number of the G450 and login/passwords for various access methods Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP): IP addresses and setup commands for the MGP Installation Site Information: Customer and site contact information ● ● Issue 1 January 2008 289 . software.

7x or Internet Explorer 5. 255. 8 data bits. You will not be able to obtain the license file or to perform remote feature activation without the SSO login authentication process.5.0 Ethernet connections laptop default address and mask: 192. no parity.252 browser: no proxies communications properties: 9600 baud rate.13. no flow SSO login Obtaining this login will require that you complete the authentication process.255.255. You will not be able to obtain the license file or to perform remote feature activation without the SSO login.Information Checklists Installer's Checklist Tools laptop with 32 MB RAM 40 MB available disk space RS-232 port connector or Ethernet interface cross-over Ethernet cables direct Ethernet cable serial cable and adapter USB flash drive (optional) screwdriver Software Windows 95/98/ME/XP/NT/2000/Vista operating system FTP server program. 1 stop bit. Dial plan IP addressing plan List of customer-provided IP services 290 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . TFTP server program and SCP server program are recommended Telnet program terminal emulation program: HyperTerminal or other TCP/IP networking software: bundled with Windows OS web browser: Netscape 4.11.

Serial Number and Login Information Serial Number and Login Information G450 Serial Number Logins Name & Password S8300 Server G450 Media Gateway SSO Authentication Login ftp Communication Manager anonymous email address Issue 1 January 2008 291 .

Therefore configure the ICC-VLAN only if you wish to configure it for a VLAN other than 1. Create a vlan and enter its configuration context: vlan id interface vlan In the context of the vlan interface. set the current vlan as the icc-vlan: icc-vlan Set the VLAN ID of a LAN port (10/5 or 10/6) to the VLAN number of the ICC-VLAN: vlan id module number port number hostname gateway IP address IP address1 IP address2 IP address3 IP address4 set port vlan Define the CLI prompt Define a default gateway Create a list of valid Media Gateway Controller(s) hostname ip default-gateway set mgc list Display device information show system 292 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . the ICC-VLAN is 1. assign an IP address and subnet mask to the interface: IP address netmask ip address In the context of the interface. For example: Requested Fields vlan id Information to enter interface vlan In the context of the interface. define this interface as the PMI pmi Configure the ICC-VLAN Note: By default.Information Checklists Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) Task Define a Primary Management Interface (PMI) CLI Command Enter the context of the interface which you want to set as the Primary Management Interface (PMI).

Installation Site Information Installation Site Information Site Name Installation Address Main Phone Shipping Address Customer Contact Name Title Phone: FAX: Mobile: Pager: email: Off-hours contact: Sales/AE phone: Other Contact Info: Salesperson/ Account Exec Notes to installer: access procedures. safety/security procedures Access Contact Name Title Phone: FAX: Mobile: Pager: email: Off-hours contact: Installer Name Date of Installation Issue 1 January 2008 293 .

Information Checklists 294 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

as well as add additional Avaya G450 Media Gateways as they grow in size. Note: If ordering parts. You can mix and match Media Modules. The G450 Media Gateway contains VoIP resources. a layer 2 switch. Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only) Comcode 700407802 Number of Items 1 Description G450 chassis/Main board/ 80 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 chassis/Main board/ 20 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU Rack Mount screw set for attaching the ears to the rack Rack Mount Ears Cable Management Ear Rack Mount screw set for attaching the ears to the chassis Feet Tech Laptop Cable Media Module Blanks 1 of 2 Note: 700432487 1 700017932 700438997 700439003 700305535 700318421 700318397 700336597 1 2 1 15 4 1 8 Issue 1 January 2008 295 . modular interface connectivity for traditional trunk and station access. Table 31: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway Avaya G450 Media Gateway The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is a 19-inch 3u rack-mountable device. not the 6-digit numbers. and performs the function of a gateway/gatekeeper. The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is designed to offer options and scalability. use the 9-digit "Comcode" numbers.Appendix G: Equipment List The following lists contain information necessary for ordering Avaya G450 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Server equipment. It also houses eight Media Module Bays.

Equipment List Table 31: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway (continued) Avaya G450 Media Gateway 700336621 700439011 700236680 700439029 2 1 1 1 Low-Profile blanks (S8300) G450 PSU Blank Panel Grounding Kit for multiple G450s in a 19 inch rack Cable grounding terminal-ring to open end 10AWG. 8M Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes for Customer and Services ordering Comcode 700407802 Description G450 chassis/Main board/ 80 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 chassis/Main board/ 20 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 main board 80 channels DSP daughterboard 20 channels DSP daughterboard G450 Power Supply Unit 400W AC G450 Chassis G450 Fan tray 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 2 of 2 700432487 700432495 700432503 700432511 700432529 700432537 700438278 700394992 296 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

the attributes are: Attribute CRD CRD CRD CRD CRD CRD Option 30 31 32 33 34 42 Comcode: Description 405362641: PWR CORD 9X10IN USA 17505 407786623: PWR CORD 98IN EUROPE 12013S 407786599: PWR CORD 98IN UNITED KINGDOM 14012 407786631: PWR CORD 98IN AUSTRALIA 15012 407790591: PWR CORD INDIA P250CIM 408161453: PWR CORD 96IN ARGENTINA Issue 1 January 2008 297 . One cord per gateway is required.Table 32: Equipment List: G450 Media Gateway Power Cords G450 Media Gateway Power Cords Supplies Power to the G450 Media Gateway. When you order this material code. and there are various cords depending on the power required for the country in which the unit will be installed. a descriptive attribute will be required.

248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol CCMS messages tunneled over H. Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700335144 298 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . Comcode: 700307028) 512 MB RAM Web serve Linux OS H. or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer locations.Equipment List Table 33: Equipment List: Avaya S8300B Server Server S8300B Server The Avaya S8300B Server is an Intel™-based server complex that carries: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● administration and maintenance provisioning software Hard drive (Field-replaceable.248 Signaling Protocol TFTP server The S8300B Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway.

or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer locations.Table 34: Equipment List: Avaya S8300C Server Server S8300C Server The Avaya S8300C Server is an Intel™-based server complex that carries: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● administration and maintenance provisioning software Hard drive (Field-replaceable.248 Signaling Protocol TFTP server The S8300C Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway. Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700407810 Issue 1 January 2008 299 . Comcode: 700307028) One GB RAM Web serve Linux OS H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol CCMS messages tunneled over H.

DEF DS1 LOOPBACK JACK 700A Provides the ability to remotely troubleshoot the MM 710 T1/E1 Media Module. The MM710 is RoHS compliant. B8ZS for T1 and HDB3 or AMI for E1 Stratum 3 Clock compatibility Trunk signaling for supporting US and International CO trunks and tie trunks as currently in existence The MM710 T1/E1 Media Module supports the universal DS1 conforming to 1. It is required for any customer with a maintenance contract and highly recommended for any other customer. Material Code: 700406101 Apparatus Code: None Required for any customer with a maintenance contract and an MM710 T1/E1 Media Module.Equipment List Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules Media Modules MM710 T1/E1 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394737 The MM710 T1/E1 Media Module offers the combined features of a DEFINITY DS1 circuit pack and includes the following: ● ● ● ● ● ● A built-in CSU AMI-BASIC Both A-law for E1 and μ -law for T1 Line Coding: AMI. 1 of 4 300 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .048 Mbps E1 standard ISDN PRI is also supported for T1 or E1 revenue-associated option. Highly recommended for other customers to avoid expensive technician visits. ZCS.544 Mbps T1 standard and 2.

tip/ring devices such as single line telephones. 2 of 4 Issue 1 January 2008 301 . and fax. and administrable line termination styles.Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM711 Analog Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394661 The MM711 Analog Media Module supports eight analog interfaces allowing the connectivity of Loop Start. modems or group 3 fax machines. The G450 Media Gateway supplies only +5 VDC and –48 VDC to the MM712 Media Module. MM712 DCP Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394745 The MM712 DCP Media Module allows connectivity of up to eight 2-wire DCP voice terminals. The 24 ports are provided via a 25-pair RJ21X amphenol connector. Analog DID trunk connections are to be associated with the ports labeled "Line" and not "Trunk". These ports can also be configured as DID trunks with either wink-start or immediate-start. Analog DID trunks. The MM711 Analog Media Module also allows connectivity of analog. Also included is support for caller ID signaling. MM716 24 port Analog Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394703 The MM716 provides 24 analog ports supporting telephones. which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block. MM712 does not support 4-wire DCP telephones. The MM712 is RoHS compliant. The MM711 is RoHS compliant. Any other required voltages must be derived on the module. The MM714 is RoHS compliant. and 2-wire analog Outgoing CAMA E911 trunks. modem. Signal timing specifications for the MM712 support TDM Bus Timing in receive and transmit modes. ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences. The MM716 is RoHS compliant. The MM712 is also self-protecting from an over current condition on a tip and ring interface. Loop range secondary protection is provided on the MM712. Each port may be configured as either a trunk interface or a station interface. MM714 Analog Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395221 The MM714 Analog Media Module supports four analog stations and four CO trunks. Ground Start.

MM720 BRI Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394752 The MM720 BRI Media Module contains eight ports that can be administered either as BRI trunk connections or BRI endpoint (telephone and data module) connections. Information is communicated in two ways: ● Over two 64 Kbps channels called B1 and B2 that can be circuit-switched simultaneously ● Over a 16 Kbps channel called the D channel that is used for signaling. The circuit switched connections operate as 64 Kbps clear channels when in the data mode. the MM720 BRI Media Module supports up to eight BRI interfaces. The MM720 BRI Media Module does not support combining both B channels together to form a 128 Kbps channel.Equipment List Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM717 24 port DCP Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394711 The MM717 DCP Medial Module supports 24 DCP stations. For BRI endpoints. each of the eight ports on the MM720 BRI Media Module can support one integrated voice/data endpoint or up to two BRI stations and/or data modules. to the central office at the ISDN S/T reference point. World Class BRI. The MM717 is RoHS compliant. 3 of 4 302 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . The D channel occupies one time slot for all eight D channels The circuit switched connections have a u-law or A-law option for voice operation. Failure to comply with this restriction could cause harm to personnel or equipment. or up to 16 trunk ports. The MM720 is RoHS compliant. The MM717 uses a 25-pair amphenol connector on the media module’s faceplate. The 24 DCP ports are intended for in-building use only. Note: The MM720 BRI Media Module cannot be administered to support both BRI trunks and BRI endpoints at the same time. The MM720 BRI Media Module provides -40 volt phantom power to the BRI endpoints. Supported endpoints must conform to AT&T BRI. Note: For BRI trunking. Phone lines connected to those ports are not to be routed out-of-building. or National ISDN NI1/NI2 BRI standards.

The MM722 is RoHS compliant. The MM340 is RoHS compliant. MM342 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700397136 The MM342 Media Module supports one USP WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. 4 of 4 Issue 1 January 2008 303 .Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM722 2-port BRI Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395239 The MM722 BRI Media Module supports two BRI ports. MM340 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700397128 The MM340 Media Module supports one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. The MM342 is RoHS compliant.

Equipment List 304 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway .

. . . . . . . . . 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . EC500 Extension to Cellular systems . . . . 52 E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . 152 . . . Accessories box. . . . . . . . . 808A Emergency Transfer Panel. . connection to loudspeaker paging system DIP switch settings . installing . . 47 DCP telephones . . . . . . . . 58 Numerical 400B2 Adapter . . . 888B converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . 49 chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 general description . 83 . . . . . . . . 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . 60 . . 42 ART (Automatic Registration Tool). . . . . . . 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing connectivity . . LSP failover . 53 and enabling a modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 . . . . 50 trunk connecting . . . . . . . . . Off-PBX Station systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 . . . 280 . . . . . . . . . . . 132 telephone. . . . power connections . . . . . . . . . Adjunct IOLAN+. . . . . . . 29 circuit protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909A universal coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Accounting Systems .Index Index Alarm configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 . . . . . . . . 58 data and voice devices . 239 Approved grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Announcements. . . . . . . . 287 . . . 201 Allocating media module slots . . . . 63 and enabling a USB modem gateway with S8300 . . . . RFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . 909A/B universal coupler . . . 58 endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES) . . 222 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . running for RAS IP address . . . 287 . . . 285 port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephones . . trunks . 47 Ethernet WAN link . . . DC version . . . . . . 287 . . . . . . . . administering . . DEFINITY Wireless Business System . . . . . . . . . connecting analog telephone to . 280 . . . . . . configuring in IW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 A Access. . . . . . . . . 55 Analog line circuit pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Attaching amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . . Avaya Interactive Response systems . . connecting to . . . 26 . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 installing authentication file in GIW . . . . . . . . 50 telephone port LEDs . . . . . . . 287 . . . . Avaya Modular Messaging systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway . . . . . . 134 ASG authentication enabling in GIW . . . . . 198 OSS. . . . . . 288 . 234 . . . After installation overview . . . . end-to-end . . . . . . . 47 Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . . . . . . . contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Amphenol cable. . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . 200 SNMP. . . . . . . . 56 computer . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 analog trunk . . . . TN2183 . . . . . . . . 54 WAN link . 53 ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . . 55 analog telephone to analog port . . . . . . . 909B universal coupler AC version KS-22911L2 power supply . . Call Management System . . . . . . . . Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . 288 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 . . . . . . . 286 . . . . . . 35 Alternate Software Bank button . . . . . . . . . . 262 . . . configuring in IW . 181 Asynchronous TCP/IP links . . . . sources of information . . . Intuity AUDIX Messaging systems . . 20 . . . 151 . . . . . . . . . . connecting to analog port . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . . 83 84 83 83 83 Issue 1 January 2008 305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 . . . Administrator logins adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 . . . . . . . . . 22 ASB button . attaching to MM716 or MM717 . . . . . 285 . . . 286 . . . 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152 configuring . . . . 158 optional services. . . . . . . 63 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 uploading . . importing . . . . . . . 204 new. . . 222 installing in IW . . . . . 54 modem to gateway without S8300 . . . 160 modem configuring . 171 software unpacking . . . . 151 license file. 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular systems. installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Gateway Device Manager. . . . . . . . . 238 S8300 upgrades . . . 81 Domain Name Server (DNS). . . . . . . configuring laptop for . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 master key. . . . . . . . . . .Index external router . . 184 status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet. . . . 189 firmware upgrading . . . . . . . selecting . . . . . . 99 without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 INADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Network Time Protocol (NTP). . . . 103. . . . . . . . . . 198 name and number list. . . . . . launching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 upload source. . . . 100 upload source. . . . 47 USB modem to gateway with S8300 . 181 obtaining gateway . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . 57 Attendant console auxiliary power . . installing . . . . . . . 169 new installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 software . . 166 Primary Management Interface (PMI). . . . 182 laptop. 165 primary controller IP addresses. . . . . 173 IP phone upgrade files. . . . . . . . . 159 description . . . . 151 country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring 174 306 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . configuring . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . 237 installations . . . . 236 AUDIX IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 version requirements for LSP . . . . . . . upgrading Java applet via FTP/ TFTP . . . . changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 coresidency. . . . . . . . . . 161 overview . . . . 235 Avaya Communication Manager (CM) software unpacking in IW . . . 167 OSS alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . selecting . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 firmware. . . . external . . . 151 phone message files. 198 authentication file. . . . . 187 date/time information. . . . . . . . . . . . . displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) accessing . . . 202 license file. uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 accessing. installing . . . . . . . . upgrading . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . 103 installation. . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . 239 Authentication CHAP. . . 158 IP addresses. . . . 228 file for CM installing in IW . restoring . . . . . . . sources of information . . . . . . . . . 171 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 endpoints. . . . . . 21 Automatic Registration Tool see ART Auxiliary power for attendant console . . . . 164 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Ethernet switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . saving . . . . . . . . 152 alarms. . . . . . . . . . configuring to access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 administrator logins adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 distance limitations . . importing . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 gateway configuring . 170 installation log file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 upgrading in IW . installing . . . 48 Avaya Gateway Manager. 49 ISDN trunk . . . . . . 200 overview . 78 USP WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . 197 extension ranges. . . . . . . . . . . 40 IP telephone to gateway. . . . . . . 238 LX . . . 158 NVRAM factory defaults. . . . . . 176 and upgrading . . 48 switch or network data port . 179 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) configuring . . 188 CM authentication file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 WAN link . . . . . . . . 162 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . confirming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 location . . . . 156 upgrading existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 server . . . . . 21 for gateway installing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . initial . . . . . . . . . . 159 optional item checklist . . . . . . configuring . . 183 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 via S8300 . . . . . . 181 call routing. 58 ground conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 with CD-ROM drive . . confirming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shared resources of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . configuring in IW . Call Accounting Systems. . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 read planning documentation . . . . . generating . 24 unpacking . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting . . . . . . . . . . 186 translation defaults. . .Index product ID. . . . . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Modular Messaging systems. . . . . . converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . without cable guides . . . . . 157 Avaya Interactive Response systems. . . 31 types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 . . . . 191 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 running. . . . . . . . . . 158 root password. configuring . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . CBC (Coupled Bonding Conductor) . . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) data collection. . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . 195 UPS. . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 . . . . . . BRI stations. . . . . . 168 usage options. . . . . . . 166 Server IP addresses. . . . 279 . . . . . 175 V3 user. changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 removing . . . . . . viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . . . . . . 31 checks before . . . 287 Avaya Navy Shipboard Services . . . . . . . 59 133 B Backing up the gateway to USB mass storage device 123 Before installation environmental verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . displaying . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . administering . . . . . . . 149 . . . . . . . . 279 29. . CHAP authentication enabling . . . . . 160 required item checklist . . . . sources of information Call routing. . . . . . . . . 197 modifying IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . upgrading software . . . . . . . . . 134 C Cabinets multi-carrier. switch-to-adjunct link. . . . . . . . . configuring . . 155 telephony parameters. . . . . . viewing . . . . . . . installing . . front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . . . 190 list of. . Cable guides on mounting bracket . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . 153 S8300 Server IP addresses. . . information on . . . . . . . . . . 58 . . . . . 27 Boot banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 parameters . . . . . . . . . 30 30 32 32 49 280 . . . . . . . . 187 translation information. . . . . . 25 Issue 1 January 2008 307 . . . . . . . Chassis dimensions and weight . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . 170 trunk adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting to ISDN port Busy tone disconnect equipment . . . . . Buttons ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . changing . Call Management System. . . . . . . 196 status. . . . . . . . 19 required equipment . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . 279 . single-carrier. . . . . . . for wall . . . . . . 228 . . . . . . . . . . . sources of information . . . 175 system data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 67. . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Avaya Off-PBX Station systems. . . 24 grounding verification . . . . . 279 . . . . . 192 configuring . . . attaching to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 power verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . CDR see Call Detail Recording (CDR) CD-ROM drive. . . . . . . connecting . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting for rack attaching . 201 V1 community strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 79. . . . 258 258 259 260 286 188 285 . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . 134 . . . . . . . . . 101 with cable guides . . . . . . CCA port . . . 279 . information on . gateway announcements . . . 287 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . installation see Gateway chassis installation Checking available number of power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 SNMP alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . administering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sources of information . . . . information on . . . . . parameters. . 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . 134 Box inventory . . . . . . . . Calling queue . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . . enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . 59 Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES). . . . . . . . . . . . 19 site requirements . . . . . . . . 26 Brackets. . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call center .

. . . . 21 . 113 gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-script . . . 209 initial in GIW . . . . . . . . . for DC in loopback jack . 81 basic . . . . . . . . . 89 trunk . . . . . . . . . . Circuit packs TN2183 analog line . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy usb SW_imageA . . . . 202 . . . . 158 . . . . Combination limitations for media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 . . . . . . 115 save translation lsp . . . . . . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading firmware via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . via FTP/TFTP . . . 111 erase phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording information for . . . . installing in IW . . . . . . configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . . via USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading overview . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . 100 telephone . 88 software. . . . . . . . 84 show application-memory . . . . . . . 104 . . . 91 WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . license file downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . . . description . . . . . 115 . . 88 Conditions good for installation . . . . . . 35 modem in IW . . . . 111 . . installing in IW . . . . . . . . 151 limitations of media modules . upgrading in IW . . . . . . . for accessing IW . . . . . . . . . 151 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 . . . . . . . . . . front and rear . 89 telephone software. . . . . 164 . C-LAN board. . . . . . . . . 285 . . . . . 115 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 copy usb module . . 115 show controllers . . . . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . 100 . . copy ftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . 91 trunk software. . 116 copy tftp phone-script . . . . . . . 279 . . . 105 copy tftp module. Command Line Interface see CLI Commands copy ftp EW_archive . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . 104 . . 116 copy tftp EW_archive . . . . 249 laptop. . . via S8300 . . . . . . . . recording information for . . . . 25 . . . 256 . . . . . . . . . . 279 NTP in IW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy running-config startup-config . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . .Index environment before installing . . . . via Telnet . selecting . 24 . . . . selecting in GIW . . . . . 279 . . . . administering IP addresses of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy tftp SW_imageA . . . . . 99 DS1 loopback jack checking for DC . . . . . 169 remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 . . . . . . . . . . 104 . grounding . . . copy ftp module . 116 . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . list of optional and required items in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . . . . 24 Configuration Avaya Communication Manager software via S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . . . . . 112 HyperTerminal. . 210 . upload source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 . 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CM authentication file downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . . 151 LAN device on gateway . 161 . 47 downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 92 308 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . 105 copy usb EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageA . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . 116 copy usb phone-script . . . . . . . 279 . . . 171 . . . . . . . . 116 ip tftp-server file-system size . . . . . . . . . . . software unpacking in IW . . . . . . . . . . copy scp phone-script . . 127 . . . . . . . recording information for . . . . . . . . . . 277 . . . . . 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy tftp SW_imageB . . . . 162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageB . . 209 initial in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Computer connecting to the gateway . 111 copy usb SW_imageB . . Clearance. . . . . . . . . 149 . . . . Coaxial converter. . 276 files upgrading IP phone. . . . 88 laptop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Multi-Tech hardware required for . . 127 show interfaces serial . . . . . . . . . . . setting up on . . . . . . . . . . upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection. . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy tftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . . overview . . . 103 . . . . . . . . 888B for multi-carrier cabinets . . . 111 copy usb phone-image. . . . . . . 56 . software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integrity of local equipment on DS1 span . . . with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . TNPRI/BRI converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . copy usb SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy usb SW_imageB CLI command . . 49 . . serial . . . . . . Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . . . . . . . . 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch or network data port . . 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . . 247 music-on-hold FCC-registered equipment . . . . . 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 133 . . . . . . . Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-image CLI command . . . . . . 247 . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 trunk. . . . . . . . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . copy ftp phone-script CLI command . . 231 . . . . . power to the gateway . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . copy usb EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . copy tftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . port description . . . . . . . . . . . 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . testing after installation . . . KS-23395-L4 connecting registered music source to gateway via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 . . 111 . . . . . . . . Services port to computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . USP WAN link . copy tftp phone-image CLI command . 26 279 279 279 279 279 279 279 104 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting analog telephone to analog port . . . . . . . . endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety ground . . copy tftp SW_imageB CLI command . . . . 83 132 133 . . . 47 . . . . . . . . selecting in IW . . . . . . . copy usb module CLI command . . . . . . . . 54 . . . . 111 . . . WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console (CON) port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephone . 57 . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . . sneak-current protection devices. . 235 . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . 111 . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageB CLI command . and enabling a modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . 63 . 53 . . . . . . . . . . . DCP telephones . analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 . . . . . . . . testing . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server cabling . . . . . external router . . . Connections adjunct power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of gateway package . . . . . 249 . . ISDN trunk . 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy tftp SW_imageA CLI command . . LAN device. . . . . . . . 58 . DC version . . 59 . . printer to gateway via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . Connectivity IOLAN+ 104. . . . . music source registered to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . 88 . . . . . . . . . . . copy scp phone-script CLI command. . . . . . . . . 115 . . . 58 . . . . . . serial modem in GIW . E1/T1 WAN link . . . . . . . . IP telephone to gateway. . . . . . . . . end-to-end . . copy usb phone-image CLI command . . . . . . copy ftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact closure implementing . 54 . . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupled Bonding Conductor see CBC Coupler KS-23395-L3 connecting unregistered music source to gateway . 47 . . . . 78 . . . 50 . . . . . . copy usb phone-script CLI command . . . . 284 . . 116 104 104 . . . .Index software. . . . . . . . 48 . trunk . . . non-FCC-registered equipment . . copy tftp module CLI command . 63 . . TNPRI/BRI for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . 56 . . copy ftp SW_imageA CLI command . . installing . . . . 43 . . . . . . . . . . modem after running GIW . . . . . computer to Services port . . . . . . over-voltage protection devices . USB modem gateway with S8300 . . . . 258 . . . . . Country. . . . . . . . general description . . for single-carrier cabinets . . 281 281 255 . . . . . . . . 262 . for single-carrier cabinets . . . unregistered music source to gateway via universal 909A. . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . computer . recording information for . . . . . . server . data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . . 90 . . . 111 187 282 284 283 280 Issue 1 January 2008 309 . . . . . . . . 116 105 105 . . . . . . . . . Converter for multi-carrier cabinets CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment circuit protection devices . . 234 . . 47 . . copy running-config startup-config CLI command . . 116 105 105 . . . . . . . . unregistered to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . . . . . . 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing . 56 . . . . . . 49 . . . . . 44 . . copy ftp module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . USB gateway with S8300 . . copy tftp phone-script CLI command . . . . in GIW . 52 . .

. . . . . . . . 108 license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) . . . . . 21 gateway authentication file . 87 Dimensions of plywood board for mounting gateway . . . . . . . . . . 212 . . 114 latest version of guide from website . general description . . . . . . . 19 Domain Name Server see DNS Downloading CM authentication file . . . 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 . . . one-number complex . . on MM340 media module . . . . . span . . Endpoint devices connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 with smart jack . . . . . . . 57 . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . .21 serial cable . . . . . 13 recent firmware updates . . . obtaining . . . . . . serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing and adding . . . . . . . 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . 47 new. . KS-22911L2 power supply loudspeaker paging with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . 58 . . configuring in IW . . . . . 276 installing . . . . . . . . . . 909B AC version . . . . . . . . Enabling ASG authentication in GIW . . ECC see External Communications Controller Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) importing in GIW . . . . . . . ports for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . 63 226 184 . . . . . . . . 21 firmware to local PC . . . . . 72. 280 . . . . . . . . . . 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 license file . . . . . . 87 . WAN link. . . . from smart jack . . . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . 264 testing data integrity . . . . 72. . . . . . . . . 280 . . 57 E E1 trunk. . . . . signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP switch settings . connecting . . CHAP authentication . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 data and voice. . . 19 DIP switch settings for 909A/B universal coupler . . . 280 . . DTE V. . connecting . . . . . Endpoints installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . 57 telephone. with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB gateway with S8300 . . checking integrity of local equipment on T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remote port module. . 99 DS1 loopback jack . . . . . . . 112 firmware to local TFTP sever . . 52 DEFINITY Wireless Business System sources of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 265 270 270 265 274 264 265 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . importing in IW . . . . . . . . . . 264 checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 DCP media modules. . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 310 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 port. . . . . . . 263 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. . . . . . . AC version. . . . . CWY1 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . 238 D Date/time information. . 285 . . . . . . . . . new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading Java applet via a USB device 111 Devices connecting endpoint . . . 265 configuration checking for DC . . . . . planning . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . 288 Device Manager. . . . . . jumper pinouts . . . . . . . .35 serial cable . . . . . . 21 IP telephone configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Documentation. . . Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . .Index 909A/B . . . . . 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wideband non-signaling . 280 DNS. . . . . . . . from ISCU . . . . . . 24 upgrade software from CD-ROM . . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 . . testing . . . . . . . . . . 78 . . modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . 264 without smart jack . . . . . . . without smart jack . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . . administering . . . . . . . . . . 67. . .

. . . . . . 27 erase phone-image CLI command . upgrading example using FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 278 279 279 285 . . 48 WAN link. . . . . . . 116 ETH LAN port connecting computer to . . 285 without universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . external Avaya . . . . . 58 ETR port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Extension ranges. . . . files upgrading IP phone . . . . . . . . . Fastening chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP80 modules . . . . . . . . default bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 134 . . . . 58 F Fan tray.Index mounting solution for harsh . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . . MP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . router. . . . . . . . . . 48 description . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware banks . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding in IW . . . . 279 hardware to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . affixing to stand gateway on table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation worksheets. from primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 server to . . . . . . . downloading to local TFTP server . 47 ETH WAN port connecting computer to . . . . 24 EPW see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) Equipment busy tone disconnect . . . or G650 media gateways . . . . . . 285 Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . downloading recent updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . . 19 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway main board . . . . . connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . . . . . 58 external router to . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 testing . . Front panel gateway buttons ASB . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G600. . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 96 93 94 94 94 97 94 134 . . . . . . . . 48 Communications Controller (ECC) . . . . . . . configuring MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . 47 Ethernet WAN link to. . . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . 262 troubleshooting . gateway CLI commands for. . . 285 required for installation gathering . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber multiplexers configuring DS1 loopback . . . . . . . . . 113 109 134 105 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uploading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . downloading to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 installing . . . . . . . VoIP modules . . . . 133 for network switching . . . Server Values worksheets. . . . fan tray . power supply . in IW . installing from TFTP server on the S8300 Server loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 External Avaya Ethernet switch . . . . 47 external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . 33 276 . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . 262 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 verifying for installation . . . 58 server to . . . . . 278 administering . 246 removing . . . . . . . 133 European Standard Paging Access (ESPA) radio paging equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 unpacking . 281 non-FCC-registered connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Call Detail Recording (CDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Ethernet switch. . . . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 . . . . . . . . CMC1. 281 paging . 258 music-on-hold FCC-registered connections . . . . . . . . . ringing . . . . . . 112 108 102 102 103 101 104 . . . . . . 285 loudspeaker for MCC1. . . . . . . . Feet. . . . 111 219 177 105 106 101 178 134 134 Issue 1 January 2008 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying files to S8300 Server . . . memory modules . . preparing . 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 endpoint devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . preparing . . . . .

. . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 212 . . . S8300 Server overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . configuring in IW . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 LEDs . . . ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 LEDs . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . channels. . overview . . . . 133 . . . . front panel buttons ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . . . . . via USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM314 LEDs . . 146 . . . . . . . . . 137 . . . . . . . . 139 . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printers via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index description . . . . . . . . USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . via FTP/TFTP . . . upgrading CLI commands for. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . 135 . to local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 G Gateway authentication file. . . . . ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . media modules MM312 LEDs . . . . 144 . . . . . . in GIW . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system LEDs . . . CLI commands for. . . . . . . . MM340 LEDs . . . ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . firmware banks . . . 137 . . . . overview . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 LEDs . . downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . 81 209 151 173 . . . . . . . . . . . CCA . . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . 111 101 134 134 312 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . 132 . . . . . . 139 . MM714 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console (CON) . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . . . . . . . . 135 . . MM711 LEDs . . . . 132 . . . . . 135 . in IW . . . . ports analog telephone . . . . 132 . . . 140 . . . . . MM717 LEDs . 135 . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number of supported . . . . . . . 143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview ports . . . . 112 108 109 104 . . LEDs . . MM722 LEDs . . call center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . . . . overview ports . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . 137 . overview . . . . 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . initial gateway in GIW . . . . initial in IW . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . overview . . . . . ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . ports . . . overview ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 262 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing from TFTP server on S8300 Server. . . announcements . . . 148 . . . . . . . . ETR . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . Services . . overview . . configuration . . . ports . . . power to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . media module slots . . . 111 102 102 103 101 104 . . . . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 . . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . backing up to USB mass storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM316 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . downloading files to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . components. 144 . . . . . 133 . . 132 . . . . overview . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . initializing in GIW . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line . . . from primary controller . . . . MM720 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . 131 . 141 . 133 . 136 . 132 ports . . 135 . . 21 123 239 239 . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . router . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 67. . . . USB . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 . . . . . before inserting . . . . prerequisites for . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . . initializing . . . . . . music source registered connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . tabletop installation . LAN device adding to. . . 20 telephone adding to . . . . . . . . ETR . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . rack mounting . . 88 . . verifying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Issue 1 January 2008 313 . . . . . . . 89 configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enabling . . . . . 29 . . . . 90 configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . equipment required . . . . . . . . 212 . . 123 replicating to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . . . ports analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 configuration. . . . . . . . 206 Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) ASG authentication. . . . . . . . . . 126 trunk adding to . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . removing. . 123 restoring from USB mass storage device . enabling . . 87 . 228 authentication file. . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . 20 replicating to USB mass storage device . . . session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unregistered connecting to via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . 132 . . . . removing . installation chassis media modules. . . . . . . ground block for multiple . . . . . . . router . system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . 212 firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . 230 IP addresses. . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . required for VPN . . . . 92 modules. . . . . . . . changing . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . package. 212 firmware. 149 chassis . . . loudspeaker paging. . . 221 master key. . . . . . . . 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 supported modems . . . . . . configuring on . . license file downloading to laptop . modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 IP phone upgrade files. administering . . . . . . . 282 . mounting options . . 219 gateway components. . 133 . . 21 . 93 93 93 93 19 . . . . . . 123 restoring from . . . . . . S8300 Server. . main board inserting . . . . . . . . . adding to . . . . . . . . . 283 . . . . . . . . 224 license file. . . . . . . . . saving . . . 220 Media Gateway Controller (MGC). installing . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 . . . . . . . configuring on . . CCA . . . . . . 284 . . . . 212 installation log file. . . . . initializing . 131 . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 USB connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initial gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 WAN line. 72. 123 voice modules. . . . . technical . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initializing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . 32. . . . . . selecting . . 230 enabling . . . 19 . . . . . . . 230 enabling . . . . installing . . 285 . . . 29 . . . . . . 87 Gateway Device Manager. . . . . 222 basic configuration . 226 serial connecting . . . . . . . . 33 . 209 description . . . . . . . replacing . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prerequisites for . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server. 63 testing after running GIW . . . . uploading . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding to . . . 91 USB mass storage device backing up to . . . . . 132 . 78 enabling (gateway without S8300) . . . . . . 20 specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 . . . . . . . . . . . 89 troubleshooting . . . . 228 COM port. . . . media module slots . . . . . . . . . . 209 CHAP authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services . . . . 231 enabling (gateway with S8300). . . . . . 26 prerequisites for installing S8300 Server in . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . 218 modem connecting after running GIW . . . . . .Index description . . . . . . . . . . ETH WAN . . . wall mounting . adding to. . . . line . . . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting hardware required . . . . . . . . upgrading . . . on-board modules adding . . . . . overview . contents of . . . launching in IW . . non-S8300. . . . . . . importing . . . Console (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . 88 . 123 serial number . . . . . . . . . configuring . hooking up from . . . . . . upgrading . . 81 Electronic PreInstallation Worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . 253 . . . 102 installation session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . .

. . . . . . . 16 typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Grounding approved . . . . 47 Ground block for multiple gateways . . . . . . for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . attaching . . . . . . 40 location . . . . . . . . . 216 V3 user. . . . 239 messaging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 administering . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 wires. . . 16 . . . . . . . 263 with smart jack . . 284 unregistered on gateway . . . Hot-inserting WAN and LAN modules Hot-swapping media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 DS1 loopback jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . within the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 trunk group . 41 Ground conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 contact closure . . 281 testing DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . HyperTerminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 gateway . . . . . . . . 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changing . . 265 Internal Communications Controller (ICC) . . . . . . . . .VLAN configuring using CLI . . . . . 40 overview . . . . 26 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . 41 verifying . setting up . . . . . . 217 usage options. . . . . . . . . . . 204 music source non-registered . . . . . 83 trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . 281 registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 running. . . . . . . . . . . . 13 related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Guides for cables . . verifying in IW . . . . . 67 root password. attaching . . 43 Guide downloading latest version from website . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Intuity AUDIX hunt group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . 238 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . 13 security alert labels . . . . confirming in IW . . . . . 83 AUDIX IA770 . . . . . ICSU see Integrated Channel Service Unit Import name and number list in IW . . . . . . . . . . . equipment required 246 log file saving in GIW . . 19 testing connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 conditions good for . 230 saving in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 . configuring . . . . . . . . . 59 before you start . . . 105 Installing the gateway chassis see Gateway chassis installation Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) . sources of informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 equipment. . . . . 83 LSP failover . . 13 sending comments about . . . . INADS address . . . . . . . . preparing . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . 237 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 SNMP V1 community strings. . . . . . . . 262 firmware from TFTP server on the S8300 Server 109 gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . 83 worksheets. . . . . . 39 S8300 Server module . . 190 . . . . . . . 248 first time . . . . 249 I ICC see Internal Communications Controller ICC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 CBC . . .Index Primary Management Interface (PMI). . . . . . 85 Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 314 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 general requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Gigabit Ethernet port. . . . . . 253 port . . . . . . 253 cabling connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263. . . . 84 telephones . . . . entering . . . . . . . 170 media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . 17 trademarks . . . . 29. 40 Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . 30 H Help resources for technical assistance technical assistance international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 connecting . . . . . . configuring 215 RAS IP address. . . . . . . . . 205 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Inventory of packed items . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Installation 808A Emergency Transfer Panel . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . 42 requirements . Inserting . . . . . . . 281 new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 249 . . . MM716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . ip tftp-server file-system size CLI command ISDN adapters . . . . . License file for CM . . . 49 113 113 116 K KS-22911L2 power supply . . . . . . LAN devices adding and connecting . . . . . 279 . . . . PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . MM342 . . . . . configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP services. . . HyperTerminal. . . . . . . . 256 . power supply indicator . . 247 . . . . 256 . . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . system . . . MM722 . . . RAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . obtaining . . . . . . . upgrade files downloading . . . . . . 279 . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . 256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . firmware files. . . 88 . . . IP address configuring in GIW . . . . . . MM711 . overview . . . port . . . . 279 . . . . . 256 . . . 246 . switch. . . . . . . . MM710 . . . . . 255 . . . . . . . . . . . converters . . . . connecting to the gateway . . . . . . setting up . . . . . . 88 247 . . . . . . considerations . . . . . 252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . 115 . . S8300 Server . . . . . . 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index to adjunct and LAN . . . KS-23395-L3 coupler connecting unregistered music source to gateway KS-23395-L4 coupler connecting registered music source to gateway via . . . . 117 . . . . 279 . . . connecting switch to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . 88 . . . . . . . 252 . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 135 135 136 137 138 140 141 142 144 146 147 148 . . . . . . . 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . testing . . . . . . . BRI stations. media modules MM312 . PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 282 284 283 L Labels safety . . distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 . . . . . . 114 . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording information for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laptop. . . . . trunk. . . PRI-to-BRI for multi-carrier cabinets . . 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM314 alarm . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . IOLAN+. . . . software configuration. . . administering . . supported by local TFTP server . 119 . . IP telephones connecting to gateway . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . administering . . . . 279 . 279 . . . . . uploading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading . . . not supported by local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . examples of 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of C-LAN board. . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 . . . . 13 . . navigating . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . connecting IP phone to . . . . . for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . connectivity. . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs analog telephone port . . . . . MM712 . . . configuration files. . . . . 279 . . . 214 . . . 182 . . . . . . rebooting . . . . 54 J Jumper pinouts for 909A/B universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 49 47 88 47 107 151 132 135 135 135 . . . . . . 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . uploading in GIW . . . . . . . . port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation and administration . MM316 alarm . . TFTP server upgrade example . . setting up on . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unregistered music source to gateway via . . administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 . . . testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP node names. . . . 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 . . . . . 45 135 132 Issue 1 January 2008 315 . . security alert . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . 285 Maintenance web pages. . . Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . . 135 . . 152 Loopback jack . MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . 21 Lightning exposure . . . or G650 media gateways . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . 280 . . . . . MM316 . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . . 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accessing Malicious call trace (MCT) . 247 media module combinations . . . . . . . . . . . 137 . . G600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . new. . 147 . . . . . . . . inserting. . . . . LAN modules. power to . . . . . . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . . . 267 DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changing in IW . . . . . . . . 21 M Main board. . . MM720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 LINE port. . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . 144 . . . . . . . . 265 configuration checking for DC . . . . . distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . . . . . . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . 179 . . . . . existing. . . . . . . upgrading via USB device . . . 93 . . . . . . 285 without universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . media modules . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . on-board modules adding . . . . . 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing and adding . 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location . . . . . . Media Gateway installation before inserting media modules connecting endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . inserting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety ground. . . . . . . . . . . 93 . . 53 . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 . . . . . . . . . 29 34 33 29 27 41 37 43 131 . . . 263 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 . MM711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway inserting . S8300 . Main distribution frame (MDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for indoor use only . . . . . . . . . 264 testing data integrity . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 installation . . . . . . . . . 180 obtaining . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . firmware upgrading via FTP/TFTP . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . . 74 . . . . . . . . . . . Media modules before installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . 39 . . . . . . . . . . . ground conductors attaching . . 264 without smart jack . . administrator adding in IW . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . 264 checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . . . 152 configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 license file requirements . . . . . . . . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . 270 to smart jack . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . 21 required for LSP . . . . . . . MM342 . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 218 176 160 . . . . MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . power supply unit. . . . . 285 LSP Avaya Communication Manager version requirements21 failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 without smart jack . . . 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . . . . . . . . 93 . . . . . . . Media Gateway Controller (MGC) configuring and upgrading in IW . . . . . 40 . . . 265 from smart jack . . . . installing chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media module slots . . . . gateway chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 316 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 . upgrading in IW . hot-swapping . . 221 installing in IW . . . . 21 for gateway installing in GIW . . . . . . . . .Index installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . 58 Limitations attendant console distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Logins. . 263 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . 236 IOLAN+ 104. . . . 171 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 . . . . . . . . Master key changing in GIW . . . 34 . . . . . . . . . combination limitations of . . . . removing . 135 . . . . . . . . MM710 . MM312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 server module. . . order of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 . . . . . . SCC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 . . . in GIW . 270 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM314 . . . . . . . . 274 Loudspeaker paging equipment for MCC1. . . . . . . 87 . . MM716 . . . . . .

. . . 56 description . . . . . . 135 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . 57 media module Is s u e 1 J an u ar y 2008 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs alarm . . . . . . 135 ports . . . connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . . . . 35 voice modules. . 53 LINE port. . . . . . . 52 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . 142 ports . 140 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 MM710 E1/T1 port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . 135 MM314 10/100 Ethernet port. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 MGC see Media Gateway Controller (MGC) MM312 DCP ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 MM714 analog trunk ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 LEDs . 141 ports . . . . . 135 LEDs . . . connecting external router to 58 Gigabit Ethernet port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting IP phones to . 237 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 MM717 attaching amphenol cable to . 48 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 MM340 media module connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 WAN modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Memory modules adding . . . . . . . 139 MM712 DCP ports connecting DCP phones to . . . 56 description . . . . . . 58 connecting server to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index slot allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ports . . . . . . . . . 53 media module circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints . . . . 48 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 description . . . . . . 47 connecting IP phones to . . . . . . . . . . 53 attaching amphenol cable to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 LEDs . . . . . . 47 connecting external router to . . . . . . 54 media module circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 description . . . . 57 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 for network switching . . connecting analog telephone to . . 136 MM342 media module connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . connecting external router to 58 Gigabit Ethernet port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . 58 connecting server to . 138 LEDs . . 55 DCP ports connecting DCP phones to . . 135 ports . . . . . . . 141 MM716 analog port connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 connecting servers to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 MM316 10/100 Ethernet port. . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 media module description . . . . . . . . . 138 MM711 analog port connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . 35 slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 port . 141 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . 142 LEDs . . . . . . . . . 55 media module connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks . 47 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 media module . . . . . . . . . permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 description . . . . . . . . 50 connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . connecting E1/T1 trunk to. . . . 57 media module description . . . 138 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 media module description . . . . . . . . 48 connecting servers to . . . . 135 ports . . . . . connecting analog trunks to . . . . . . . . . 94 Messaging IA770 . 94 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 enabling for remote access . types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL. . . . with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 . 63 serial . . 29 . . 147 ports . . . . 231 gateway with S8300 . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia endpoints . . . . number of . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. . . 278 administering . 63 USB in GIW gateway with S8300 . . . . displaying in IW . . . . . . 68 278. . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . 184 serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . 63 settings. . . connecting . . . . . . . . Multi-Tech modem administering . . . . . . . . . . 148 ports . . . . Multiplexers. . . . . . . . . . 33 32. fiber configuring DS1 loopback using . . . . 32 . . . . options for chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . converter for . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 media module connecting ISDN BRI stations to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway in 19-inch rack . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 description . 146 ports . MP20 modules adding . . . . . . . . 231 dial backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in rack . . . . . . Configure Server Maintenance Web page 77 status. . . . . 230 USB gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . . . 262 262 262 262 262 . . on wall . . . . . . . . . system . . registered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-carrier cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . administering endpoints . . . . . . 276 . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 318 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . 78 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . 49 description . . . . . . 147 LEDs . 63 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . administering . . . . . . . . . . connecting endpoints . . . . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . 183 connecting after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . 226 in IW . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . 148 Modem configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 gateway without S8300 . . . . on tabletop. . . . . . . . . . . 68 USB in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system administering . . . . . . . 32 . . . . . 147 MM722 ISDN ports. . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 permanent connection for reporting alarms . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Mounting brackets for wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . 63 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 hardware to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . attaching to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . 63 serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . MP80 modules adding . . . . without cable guides . 20 testing connection after running GIW . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB . . . . . channels. . . 78 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . 79 gateway without S8300 . . . . Music source non-registered. . 148 LEDs . . . . . one-number complex . . . . . . . . . 278 MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . 144 LEDs . . . . . . one-number complex . connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . . . . . . . . . . . . . checks before . . . . . . . . . . 31 31 29 30 30 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 279 279 279 279 262 262 262 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware required . . 145 MM720 ISDN ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting brackets for rack attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Multi-Tech . . . . . . 54 media module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . 58 N Name and number list. . . . . . . . .Index installing . . . . . . . . . . . 283 . . . . . . . . . . . 210 CON . . . trunk . . . . . . . 19 Platform. . . . 19 installation . . 135 MM340 . . . . . . . 169 . . . . . 137 MM710 . . . . . . . . . interface . . . . connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 installing on gateway . . restoring factory defaults in IW . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . 262 Password RAS. . CMC1. . 136 MM342 . . . . . . unregistered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L3 connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 CCA . . 190 . . . . 133 ETH LAN . . . . 133 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 queue warning indicator . . 56 . Mutual inductance coupling . 285 Parameters. . . . . . 282 . . . . Paging equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 . . . . 56 . . . 281 . . . . . . . . . 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OSS alarm. 33 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . . . 132 MM312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 loudspeaker for MCC1. . . . . . . installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 changing in IW . . . . connecting FCC-registered equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCC1. . . 47 Ports analog telephone . 281 . . . . . . . . . . . 133 COM. . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ETH WAN . . . 281 . . . Over-voltage protection . . external ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . on gateway . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESPA radio. . . . . 255 line . . . . . . . . . . . 284 . . . . . . . . . obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 . . . . . . . . 112 Phone message files. 285 . . WAN line . 281 . G600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 MM316 . . . . . . 47 contact closure . . . . . connecting non-FCC-registered equipment . . . . . . . . . 281 . 138 Issue 1 January 2008 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting in GIW . . . . . . . . unregistered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . importing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Planning documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware. . . 135 MM314 . . Network Time Protocol (NTP). . . . . . . . . . . services. . . . . 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVRAM initializing with a jumper . . . . . KS-23395-L4 . . . . source non-registered . . . . . . . 281 . . . . . 132 connecting data and voice devices to . . . . . . . . . 47 endpoint devices to . . or G650 media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 servers to . 26 . . . . . . . 44 Plywood board dimensions . . . . . . . 47 the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . administering adjunct . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . Network data port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . 90 . 29 Plugging in endpoint devices . . . . . configuring in IW Node names . . . . . . . . . . . testing within and without . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 downloading gateway firmware to local . . 22 root changing in GIW . . for harsh environment . . . . . 56 P Package inventory . . . . connecting to gateway. . . . . . . . 284 . . . . 47 IP phones to . 167 . . . LAN device. . . . . . . . 165 Physical description of gateway front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 . . . 159 O Optional items in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 using to wall-mount gateway . . 202 PC connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing on gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Out-of-building installation . . . . . . . 133 ETR . . . . configuring in IW. . . . . . . . 253 connectivity testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music-on-hold (MOH) . . . Outdoor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . 166 . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . MM720. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 VoIP modules. . . MM717. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 main board. . 236 . . Positioning gateway in rack . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 . . . . . . . . 94 Replicating the gateway to USB mass storage device 123 Required equipment . . . . . . . . . 102 . . . . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware from . . MM712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 RAS IP address entering in GIW . . . . USB . . . . . . . 261 package contents . 234 . checking available number of . . . . . . 145 . . . . . 44 . . . . . 262 Remote access. . . . 280 . to gateway . configuring using CLI . . . 135 . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . 94 power supply unit . verification . . . . . . . . 215 . end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 media module . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . WAN line configuration . . . switch . . 261 Reliable Session-Layer Protocol (RSP) tool . Power supply KS-22911L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Replacing endpoint devices . . . 174 . 246 hardware for Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . telephone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation activities . 139 . . . 20 RJ-45 splitter for connecting two BRI stations. . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . connection adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . 292 . . . . . . . 33 45 27 97 19 Printers adjunct parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . administering connecting to gateway via TCP/IP PMS journal and PMS log . 96 main board on-board module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 for installing IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67. . . . . . . . . 132 . 92 . . . . . 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 . Primary controller configuring IP addresses in IW . . LED indication . . . . . . . . . . MM716. . . . . 25 . . . unit installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 R Rack mounting brackets . . . . . . . . . . 49 . . . 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preinstallation worksheet see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) Preparation installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 overview . . . 87 fan tray . . . . 278 items in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power attendant console auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . Server Values worksheets . . . 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 RFA access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . cords obtaining . . . . . . 262 downloading . . . . Primary Management Interface (PMI) configuring in GIW . . . . 100 Removing installation equipment . . local and phantom . . . . .Index MM711. . . . . . . . MM722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 installing . . management functions . removing . . . . 262 262 262 262 262 160 Q Queue warning indicator . . . . . . . . 158 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 memory module . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . gateway . . . . . . . . 22 password. . . . . MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . 143 . . . . . . switch-to-adjunct link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 RDTT see Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . . . . . gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services . . . . MM714. . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . trunk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 72 obtaining . . . . . . 173 320 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . outlets. . . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . 63 configuration via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 37 . . . . . . router . . . enabling . Product ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch or network data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 reset CLI command . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server. . changing in IW . . . 115 Restoring the gateway from USB mass storage device123 Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . technical. . . . . . . . . 19 Securing amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . 229 changing in IW . . . 20 . . . 166 Server Values worksheets. . . . . . V3 user. . . . . . . . configuring in IW . recording LAN information for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Sign-On (SSO) . 99 call center solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording telephone information for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting a computer to . . . . . . 166 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Issue 1 January 2008 321 . . . . . . . . . . show interfaces serial CLI command . 264 . upgrading Avaya CM via S8300 Server . . . . . 109 IP addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 gateway chassis. . . Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services optional. . . . . . . . . . 84 Screws required for mounting gateway . . 13 save translation lsp CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . 115 127 127 . . . 201 216 175 217 175 . . . . . 88 software upgrading using IW or the Upgrade tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . affixing to stand gateway on table . 20 testing . . if ground block not used . . . . 230 Serial number of gateway . . . . . 238 Safety ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site conditions. . . . . . . . V1 community strings.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 connecting in GIW . . 55 Security alert labels . 24 . . 63 . . . . . if ground block is used . . 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Rubber feet. . 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 . . . . . . . . . . . requirements . Survivability by modem dial backup . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . 265 . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . 279 . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . 135 prerequisites for installing in gateway . . . . . . . . . . 239 connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . upgrading via . . . . . . . Specifications. . Single-carrier cabinets. . . 209 S S8300 Server Avaya Communication Manager software. . . . 20 viewing in IW . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . 81 88 89 91 92 262 261 261 261 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . version. . . . . . . . 202 Router connecting external to gateway . . . . . . V1 community strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) administering . clearance . . . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch connecting to computer . . . . . . .35 . . . . . . . . . . . 43 labels . . . . . . 153 Running Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . 58 ports . . . . . 135 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 upgrades for IA770 Intuity AUDIX . . . . . . V3 user. . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Ruggedized mounting solution for harsh environment 29 Running Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . with CD-ROM drive . Smart jack installing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 100 155 101 149 149 149 150 . . . 43 . . . . . Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . 48 . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Server see S8300 Server Server IP addresses. . . . . 57 modem connecting and enabling . . . 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . show application-memory CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 installing firmware from the TFTP server on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . package contents . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording WAN information for . . Software Update Manager . . . . . . .Index Root password changing in GIW . . . . . 48 connecting to USB modem . . . . . . . . . checking before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . inserting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . chassis . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Serial cable DTE V. . . . 279 . . Sneak-current protection . . . show controllers CLI command . . 57 DTE X. configuring in IW . . . . . . overview . overview . 167 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . downloading . configuring in GIW . . . 106 . . . . . . . . . 133 RST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording trunk information for . . . . 134 ports description . . . 78 copying firmware to . SNMP alarm. . . . .

port . connecting . . . . . 155 T T1 DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . switch type data device . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . 113 . . . . . . settings for Maintenance web pages . . . 149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P333PWR . . . Technical assistance international . . . . . 48 . . . . . within the US . . . . 89 89 89 49 89 89 83 . rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 connectivity. . . recording information for testing . . 149 . . . . . . . upgrade example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing computer type data device . . . LSP failover . . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . navigating . . testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 . . . overview . . . 48 . . . . . . 74 . . . installing firmware from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 . . . printer . . . . . . software configuration. . 262 . . . . . . . System data. . . . . . . . . integrity of data sent over loop . . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to adjunct and LAN . . . trunks . . . . . . . . . 256 . . testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . distance from switch to LAN hub . . 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . to smart jack . . . . switch-to-adjunct link CDR. . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 84 83 83 83 267 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 administering . . . . 88 79 73 88 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation and administration . . . . . . . . chassis. P130PWR . . . . . . . . 88 . . . . . . . 48 . . . . 262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . setting up. . . testing . . . after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP server downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . power cord . . connecting to server . . . . . . . . . . . . external Avaya Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabletop installation of the gateway chassis . . 262 . . . . . . . . . Terminal server administering IP node names . . . . . . . . . . 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . telephones . . . . 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . server type data device . . . . . . . loopback jack without smart jack . . . . . . . . Telephone adding to gateway . . . . remote configuration via . . . . 92 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . translation defaults. . . . . . . . . . 113 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . . for upgrading IP phones . . . . . . . . . from smart jack . 256 . . . . . 48 . . . . . . . 89 . . . . . installation connectivity . . Task list . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . . . Telephony parameters. . . . . . . . . . . on the S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk. . . . . . . . . . 55 . . connectivity. . . . . . HyperTerminal. . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . . . . . printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . supported by local . . . 91 . 150 . . . . 16 . . . . . 116 322 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 loopback jack with smart jack . . . . . . 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resources . IP. . . . . . . . . modem connection gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . P130 . . . 260 262 . . 88 265 274 265 270 270 262 . . . . . . . . setting up 248 249 253 253 247 249 247 255 247 249 246 252 252 256 245 . . task list. . . . . . 262 . . . printers connecting to gateway via . . Terminating telephones on the MM717 and MM716 . . . . . 187 . . . viewing in IW . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cabling connection . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telnet. . . . . 48 . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . gateway . . . . . span from ISCU . . . . . . . . . telephone . IP telephones not supported by local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 . . . . . . . IP services . . . . Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 260 . . connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN device . TCP/IP connections . . . P333T . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch-to-adjunct link. . .

. . Server Values worksheets. . . modifying in IW IP route configuration . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 . . . . . . . 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage options selecting in GIW . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . configuration files downloading . . . . . . . . . . . examples of 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . . . . overview . . on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . 112 108 102 102 103 101 . . . . displaying in IW . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uploading IP phone upgrade files in GIW . . . . . . . . . . 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 115 . . . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading firmware. . . . . . list of. . . 90 . . . . 191 . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting CLI not accessible . 279 . . . several stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway has no power . . . . . 157 . . . . . 91 . . 192 . . . . . . . IP telephone upgrades . . models . . . considerations . . generating information in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . 127 . . . . . . . . . from primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 . . . 103 . . . . . . in GIW . overview . .Index on the LAN . . . . . . 170 . . . . . . . preparing . . overview . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . trunk stops working . . . in IW . . . . . . . downloading to local PC . . . . . 107 . . . . 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording information for status. . 123 . . . . . . . . 125 . . . . . . 117 . . . . . . . . . 120 . . . . . 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 . 104 . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . Uploading firmware in IW . . . . preparing . . IP telephones . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . 190 . . . . . . 197 . . . parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK port. . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . Upgrading Avaya Communication Manager software in IW . . . . . UPS configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . firmware example using a USB device . . . . . 111 105 219 177 105 106 . . . . . to local TFTP server . . . . troubleshooting . . . . 90 . . . . 53 . . . . . 285 Uninterruptable Power Supply see UPS Universal coupler 909A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . 113 120 . . . . 90 . . firmware files. . . . . . . . media module. . . . . 113 . installation worksheets. . . . . . . testing . . ordering . . . 27 . . . . . . . USB mass storage device backing up the gateway. . . . . . software S8300. after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 . 194 . . . viewing in IW . . . . 119 . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . media modules and devices . . 83 . . . . . . 99 100 178 168 242 242 242 . in IW . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . TN2183 analog line circuit pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . selecting in IW . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . . . 107 . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 . . using IW or the Upgrade tool . . . . . . . . . . . . TNPRI/BRI converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . 111 Issue 1 January 2008 323 . . via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . removing in IW . . telephone one stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 . . . . gateway firmware CLI commands for. . Trunk adding in IW . . . . . . 285 . . . . with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . 99 . . analog connecting to TRUNK port . . . 111 104 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . 53 U Uniform Call Distribution/Direct Departmental Calling (UCD/ DDC) queue . . . using FTP/TFTP . . 256 . . . . . . . connecting . . WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . .

. gateway with S8300 . 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 preparing for configuration . 123 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replicating the gateway . . . . . . 68 . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . supported by gateway . . on MM342 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 link connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USP port. . . . 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . power . . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware using CLI modem connecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 WAN configuring on gateway . . . . 92 testing . preparing. . 262 remote port module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 V Verifying environmental conditions before installation grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 E1/T1 port . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . 105 324 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 94 94 21 W Wall mounting brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 . . . . . 92 troubleshooting . . . . . 87 hot-inserting . 58 connecting to USP port . 25 . . 92 connecting . . . . . . . . . . 262 Worksheets installation. . . 57 ordering . . . . . . . . . .Index example of upgrading firmware . 57 connecting to E1/T1 port . 111 Server Values. . . 92 modules adding . . . . . . . . 231 . . . . 262 signaling . . . . . . 127 Wideband endpoints non-signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VPN license file . . . . . 78 . . . . . . . . . . . 68 . 123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enabling in GIW gateway with S8300 . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . 87 software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording information for . . VoIP modules adding . 106 . . . . preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . restoring the gateway . .